Honeywell Kmd 250 Users Manual PG Cover R4

KMD 250 to the manual dd3b6629-9ac5-4faf-bd2c-73945aa0d89c

2015-01-23

: Honeywell Honeywell-Kmd-250-Users-Manual-261439 honeywell-kmd-250-users-manual-261439 honeywell pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 274 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

BKMD 250

Multi-Function Display/GPS

Pilot’s Guide

Covered by US Pat. 6512975

WARNING

The enclosed technical data is eligible for export under License Designation NLR

and is to be used solely by the individual/organization to whom it is addressed.

Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.

Reproduction of this publication or any portion thereof by any means without the

express written permission of Honeywell International Inc. is prohibited. For fur-

ther information contact Technical Publications; Honeywell; One Technology

Center; 23500 West 105th Street; Olathe, Kansas 66061. Telephone: (913) 712-

0400.

KMD 250 Multi-Function Display

and

KMD 250 Multi-Function Display with GPS

Software Version 02/01 or later

R-1

Revision History and Instructions

Manual KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Revision 4, August 2007

Part Number 006-18281-0000

Summary

S/W 02/01: Added XM functionality to the KMD 250

R-2

Revision History and Instructions

Manual KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Revision 3, December 2005

Part Number 006-18281-0000

Summary

S/W 01/08: Added Airport Type on Airport Info Screen on page 1-25

Added TIS patent statement on inside front cover.

Changed Awareness to Avoidance on page 1-1.

Changed 100L to 100LL on page 1-27.

Added Definition for Heading on TIS screen on page 3-12.

Corrections to Index pages I-1 and I-12.

R-3

Revision History and Instructions

Manual KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Revision 2, April 2004

Part Number 006-18281-0000

Summary

Added:

Internal GPS

Flight planning capability

Nearest function

User Waypoints

Direct-To function

Quick Tuning capability

Airspace Alerting

Airspace depiction

Waypoint Alerting

Turn Anticipation

R-4

Revision History and Instructions

Manual KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Revision 1, November 2003

Part Number 006-18281-0000

Summary

Change in text on Startup Caution Page.

R-5

Revision History and Instructions

Manual KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Revision 0, November 2003

Part Number 006-18281-0000

Summary

This is the original release of this publication.

R-6

Intentionally left blank

SECTION 1

BASIC KMD 250 OPERATION

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1

GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

FUNCTION SELECT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

MENU KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

RANGE KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

DIRECT-TO/NRST (NEAREST) KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

JOYSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

ROTARY KNOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

STORMSCOPE®OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

DEMO MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

FUNCTION STATUS ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

STARTUP DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8

POP-UP HELP DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

POWER DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

DATA FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

GREAT CIRCLE COURSES AND MAGNETIC VARIATION . . . . . . . . .1-14

MINIMUM ENROUTE SAFE ALTITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

INTERNAL GPS STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16

QUICKTUNE™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16

MAP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17

SELECTING A MAP DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

VFR Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

IFR Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Relative Terrain Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Baro Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

OBSTACLE LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22

Table of Contents

iKMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

toc R4 8/13/07 9:58 AM Page i

USING THE MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

Map Data Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24

Airport Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25

Navaid Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27

Airspace Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28

Airspace Alerting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29

Display Flight Plan Data on Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33

Temporarily Decluttering the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34

Find Nearest (Units Without Internal GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35

Find Nearest (Units With Internal GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37

Waypoint Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38

Turn Anticipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38

USER WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41

ENTERING A USER WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41

ENTERING A USER AIRPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47

EDITING A USER WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-52

DELETING A USER WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53

DIRECT-TO OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55

DIRECT-TO A DATABASE OR STORED WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55

DIRECT-TO USING THE JOYSTICK POINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56

OBS COURSE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56

FLIGHT PLAN OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59

VIEWING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59

VIEWING FLIGHT PLAN DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60

Fuel Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61

Changing the Data Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61

CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62

ACTIVATING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64

EDITING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66

Deleting a Waypoint in the Stored Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66

Inserting a Waypoint in the Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67

Table of Contents

ii KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

toc R4 8/13/07 9:58 AM Page ii

Changing the Name of the Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-69

Deleting a Stored Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-70

DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-71

USING DIRECT-TO IN THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-72

Proceeding Direct-To an Active Flight Plan Waypoint . . . . . . . . . .1-72

Manually Selecting an Active Flight Plan Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-73

Deleting a Direct-To Within the Active Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-74

USING OBS COURSE MODE IN THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . .1-75

Setting an OBS Course to an Active Flight Plan Waypoint . . . . . .1-75

Deleting an OBS Course Within the Active Flight Plan . . . . . . . . .1-77

TRIP PLANNING USING PRESENT POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-78

SYSTEM SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81

MAP SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81

NAVIGATION SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-84

DEMO MODE & SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-86

Demo Mode for Non-GPS Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-87

Demo Mode for GPS Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-88

Changing Demo Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-88

SOFTWARE VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-89

DATABASE VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-90

MAP DISPLAY ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-91

DATACARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-95

DATA AREAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-95

INSERTING A NEW DATACARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-96

TRANSFERRING DATA BETWEEN DATACARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-97

Store Current User Data on Another Datacard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-97

Retrieve User Data from Another Datacard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-98

DATABASE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-100

DATABASE CYCLE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-100

Table of Contents

iii KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

toc R4 8/13/07 9:58 AM Page iii

SECTION 2

FIS VDL OR XM OPERATION

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

CONCEPT OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

DATALINK WEATHER FUNCTION STATUS ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

BASIC WEATHER PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

METAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

SPECI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

TAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

PIREP (VDL ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9

AIRMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

SIGMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

CONVECTIVE SIGMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

ALERT WEATHER WATCHES (VDL ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

VALUE ADDED SERVICE WEATHER PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

NEXRAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

NEXRAD Abnormalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

NEXRAD Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

GRAPHICAL METAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

GRAPHICAL AIRMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

GRAPHICAL SIGMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

GRAPHICAL CONVECTIVE SIGMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

GRAPHICAL ALERT WEATHER WATCHES (VDL ONLY) . . . . . . . . . .2-20

SUBSCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

VDL SUBSCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Setting Up a VDL Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

Checking FIS VDL Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

Table of Contents

iv KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

toc R4 8/13/07 9:58 AM Page iv

Table of Contents

vKMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

XM WX SUBSCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

Setting Up An XM WX Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

Checking XM WX Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

NEXRAD PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

NEXRAD Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

Using the NEXRAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

GRAPHICAL METARS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Graphical METARs Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

Using the Graphical METARs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

GRAPHICAL AIRMETS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

Graphical AIRMETs Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

Using the Graphical AIRMETs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

GRAPHICAL SIGMETS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

Graphical SIGMETs Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

Using the Graphical SIGMETs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

GRAPHICAL CONVECTIVE SIGMETS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

Graphical Convective SIGMETs Page Operational Controls . . . . .2-44

Using the Graphical Convective SIGMETs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

GRAPHICAL ALERT WEATHER WATCHES PAGE (AWW)

(VDL ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

Graphical Weather Watches Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . .2-47

Using the Graphical Weather Watches Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

FIS NETWORK STATUS PAGE (VDL ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

FIS Network Status Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

Using the FIS Network Status Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

FIS TEXTUAL WEATHER PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

FIS Textual Products Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

Using the FIS Text Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54

Changing Weather Products

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55

Changing Filter Area

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56

toc R4 8/13/07 9:58 AM Page v

Table of Contents

vi KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

FIS NOTIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63

(GRAPHICAL PRODUCT) DATA HAS NOT BEEN RECEIVED . . . . . . .2-63

NO METARS AVAILABLE IN SELECTED AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63

NO METARS AVAILABLE, DATA NOT RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64

INVALID SUBSCRIPTION CODE, PLEASE CHECK AND RE-ENTER CODE

(VDL ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64

UNDERSTANDING AVIATION WEATHER REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65

UNDERSTANDING METARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65

UNDERSTANDING TAFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68

UNDERSTANDING PIREPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70

UNDERSTANDING AIRMETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72

UNDERSTANDING SIGMETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74

UNDERSTANDING CONVECTIVE SIGMETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76

UNDERSTANDING ALERT WEATHER WATCHES (AWW) . . . . . . . . .2-78

SECTION 3

TRAFFIC AVOIDANCE OPERATION

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1

TRAFFIC FUNCTION STATUS ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

TAS/TCAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

TAS/TCAS NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

OPERATIONAL CONTROLS FOR TAS/TCAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

TAS/TCAS SYMBOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Non-Threat Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Proximity Intruder Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Traffic Advisory (TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Resolution Advisory (RA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

“Off Scale” Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

“No Bearing” Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

toc R4 8/13/07 9:58 AM Page vi

TA/RA WHILE IN MAP OR WEATHER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

AUTO-POP-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

VIEWING TRAFFIC IN A DATA FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

TAS/TCAS SYSTEM FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8

NO DATA RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8

SYSTEM TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8

TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9

TIS LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

TIS NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

TIS OPERATIONAL CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

TIS SYMBOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Proximity Intruder Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Proximity Intruder Non-Altitude Reporting (NAR) Traffic . . . . .3-14

Traffic Advisory (TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Traffic Advisory Non-Altitude Reporting (NAR) . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

“Off Scale” Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

TRAFFIC ADVISORY WHILE IN MAP DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

AUTO-POP-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

VIEWING TRAFFIC IN A DATA FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

COAST MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

TIS SYSTEM FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

No Data Received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Transponder Not Reporting Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Table of Contents

vii KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

toc R4 8/13/07 9:58 AM Page vii

SECTION 4

WX-500 STORMSCOPE® OPERATION

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

STORMSCOPE® FUNCTIONS STATUS ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

POWER-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

HEADING STABILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

CLEAR ALL DISCHARGE POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

SWITCH BETWEEN WEATHER VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

SWITCH BETWEEN DISPLAY MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Cell Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Strike Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

CHANGING DISPLAY RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

OPERATION IN STORMSCOPE® MODE WITH FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . .4-5

OPERATION IN MAP DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5

SECTION 5

SYSTEM MESSAGES

VIEWING SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2

Table of Contents

viii KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

toc R4 8/13/07 9:58 AM Page viii

APPENDIX B

COMMON WEATHER ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

APPENDIX C

GPS Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

GPS POSITION DETERMINING CONCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

GPS DATA SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

GPS SYSTEM SEGMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2

APPENDIX D

NAVIGATION TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-1

Table of Contents

ix KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

toc R4 8/13/07 9:58 AM Page ix

Table of Contents

xKMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

Intentionally left blank

toc R4 8/13/07 9:58 AM Page x

SECTION 1

BASIC KMD 250 OPERATION

INTRODUCTION

All of us at Honeywell congratulate you on choosing this product. You

are now the owner of one of the most sophisticated yet simple-to-use

multifunction displays available today. We understand you probably

can’t wait to see it in action but before you try to use it do please take

the time to read through this manual and understand its many interesting

and useful features. Time spent in familiarizing yourself with your new

KMD 250 unit will be more than repaid by trouble-free operation later,

and more importantly safe and accurate navigation.

We have made the operation of this unit as intuitive as possible through

the use of Softkeys, menus, and on-screen help, thus reducing pilots’

dependence on the manual. You should very quickly find that handling it

efficiently and expertly becomes second nature to you. Don’t be afraid

to experiment.

We thank you for your decision to purchase a KMD 250 and wish you

many happy and safe hours flying.

The KMD 250 MFD is a panel mounted Multi-Function Display system

that is available with an optional internal VFR GPS navigator. The KMD

250 is a component of the Bendix/King Integrated Hazard Avoidance

System (IHAS) family of products that are designed to improve the pilot's

ability to manage four major safety hazards: situational awareness

(moving maps), weather, traffic, and terrain avoidance.

The KMD 250 features a 3.8 inch diagonal color LCD display. It includes

a high capacity data card for storing Jeppesen aviation data as well as

cartographic map data including terrain elevation, roads, lakes, rivers,

railroads, obstacles, political boundaries, cities, and urban areas. The

card is updated on a 28 day cycle. Application software is also included

on this card.

The KMD 250 is available in two versions. One version has an internal

GPS and the other requires GPS information from an external source,

such as the KLN 94. The internal GPS is certified only for VFR opera-

tions. The functions of both versions will be discussed in this pilot’s

guide. Functions that are related to the use of the optional internal GPS

are marked with this symbol.

1-1

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Introduction

1-2

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Introduction

The KMD 250 performs the following functions:

• Configurable Moving Map Display with aeronautical and cartographic

database

• User Entered Waypoints

• Flight Planning and Direct-To

• Terrain awareness display (Terrain color coded by relative altitude)

• FIS weather data display and overlays

• TCAS/TAS/TIS traffic display and overlay

• L-3 WX-500 Stormscope® display and overlay

This Pilot’s Guide is divided into five sections and four appendices. Each

section addresses a specific function as follows:

Section 1 Basic KMD 250

Operation

Explains the use of the Map Display, Flight Planning,

Joystick, Functions Keys, Softkeys and Rotary

Knob.

Section 2 FIS VDL or XM

Operation

Explains the operation of the Flight Information

Services VHF Datalink (VDL) or XM weather prod-

ucts.

Section 3 Traffic Avoidance

System Operation

Explains operation of TCAS I, TCAS II and TIS sys-

tems as they pertain to the KMD 250. Refer to the

TCAS I or TCAS II user’s manual for more informa-

tion.

Section 4 WX-500 Stormscope®

Operation

Explains operation of the Stormscope® as it pertains

to the KMD 250. Refer to the Stormscope® user’s

manual for more information.

Section 5 System Messages Explains accessing and the meaning of system mes-

sages that may be presented by the various sys-

tems.

Appendix A Definitions, Acronyms,

Abbreviations

Explains various terms and abbreviations.

Appendix B Common Weather

Abbreviations

Explains weather abbreviations commonly seen in

aviation weather reports.

Appendix C GPS Primer An overview of how GPS works.

Appendix D Navigation Terms Definitions and examples of common navigation

terms.

1-3

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

GENERAL INFORMATION

This portion of the manual provides an overview of the user interface

controls and display presentation of the KMD 250 Multifunction Display.

This manual also provides an explanation of each of the individual dis-

plays that the KMD 250 unit presents.

The operating system of the Bendix/King KMD 250 keeps to a minimum

the number of key presses necessary to activate the various functions,

especially those most frequently used in the air. The provision of a joy-

stick makes it considerably easier to operate the unit and allows for fast

and efficient access to most functions.

1. On/Off/Brightness Control

2. Function Select Keys

3. Display

4. Softkeys

5. Data Card

6. Menu Key

7. Range Up Key

8. Range Down Key

9. Direct-To Key

NRST (Nearest) Key

10. Joystick

11. Rotary Knob

12. Softkey Labels

General Information

1-4

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

FUNCTION SELECT KEYS

These keys are used to select available data sources (as indicated on

the key) for display on the LCD. Pressing the same Function Select Key

multiple times will sequence through the available pages associated with

that function. The following diagram shows the available pages under

each function. Note that not all pages will be available in all installations.

MENU KEY

Displays the available Softkey options for the currently selected function.

RANGE KEYS

RNGΔ- Pressing this key will increase the range scale one level on the

displayed page. Range scales on other pages will not be affected.

RNG∇- Pressing this key will decrease the range scale one level on the

displayed page. Range scales on other pages will not be affected.

DIRECT-TO/NRST (NEAREST) KEY

The Direct-To Key (D) is found on units containing the optional

internal VFR GPS navigator. When pressed the Direct-To function is ini-

tiated. Direct-To will only function when the internal GPS is selected as

the current navigation source.

The NRST (Nearest) Key is found on units without the internal GPS

option. When pressed the Find Nearest Window will be displayed.

SOFTKEYS

When active, the description indicated in the label describes the key’s

present function related to the displayed page. Whenever a new option

is selected, a new display is shown along with its new key labels. This

General Information

WX TRFCFPLMAP

TAS/TCAS/TIS

VFR Map

(Absolute

Terrain)

Active

Flightplan

Relative

Terrain Map

IFR Map

(No

Terrain)

Flightplan

Index Datalink Wx

Textual

Products

Datalink Wx

Graphical

Products

Stormscope®

1-5

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

capability of displaying operations that are only applicable to a particular

screen is referred to as ‘Soft Keying’, and allows one key to perform mul-

tiple functions without the complications of multiple key presses on a

conventional keypad.

JOYSTICK

This is a pointing device which moves a mouse-like pointer around the

display. It is primarily used for pointing at items on the map for further

information and for measuring range and bearing to specific points. It is

also used to move through menu lists.

ROTARY KNOB

The Rotary Knob, located in the lower right of the unit, has various func-

tions as indicated by a soft label when active. It is also used to move

through menu lists and change data within data fields.

STORMSCOPE®OPTION

The KMD 250 has the ability to interface and control an L-3 WX-500

Stormscope® ‘black box’ thunderstorm sensor. When the Stormscope®

interface is on and the overlay is enabled, lightning icons will also appear

on the display.

DEMO MODE

The Demo Mode can be used to practice using the KMD 250. This will

allow you to utilize it to the maximum extent.

When the KMD 250 is in the Demo Mode, it performs as if it is receiving

adequate sensor signals to use the various functions. See DEMO

MODE & SETUP later in this section.

FUNCTION STATUS ICONS

The Function Status Icons are used to show the current status of Traffic

Avoidance, Flight Information Services Weather Products and WX-500

Stormscope® functions. These icons are displayed in the lower left of

the screen. If a function is not enabled, or is not installed, that function’s

icon will not be displayed.

In general, if a Status Icon has a gray background the function is not

being displayed on the current display. This may be due to the setting

on the Map Setup Overlays Group Page. If the map display range is

beyond that set on the Map Setup Overlays Group Page, then the Status

General Information

1-6

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Icon background will be gray because that function will not be displayed

at that range setting.

If a Status Icon has a light blue (cyan) background the function is cur-

rently being displayed. This does not necessarily mean that data is vis-

ible because there may be nothing to view.

For example, if traffic icons are set to display at 30nm on the Map Setup

Overlays Group Page and the VFR Map range is increased to beyond

30nm, then traffic will no longer be overlayed on the VFR Map display

and the traffic Status Icon background will change from light blue to gray.

The following table illustrates the Function Status Icons and their mean-

ings in more detail.

General Information

Icon Colors Description

Black on cyan Traffic sensor in standby mode being displayed.

Black on cyan Active traffic information being displayed.

Black on gray Traffic sensor in standby mode, not being displayed.

Black on gray Traffic sensor active, not being displayed.

Black on yellow TIS service not available.

Flashing black on

yellow

A Traffic Advisory (TA) alert is active. The icon will be

flashing.

Flashing black on red A Resolution Advisory (RA) alert is active. The icon will

be flashing.

Black on gray with red

slash

Traffic sensor data invalid / not being displayed.

Black on cyan Stormscope®information being received and dis-

played.<MODE> is either STRK (Strike) or CELL

depending on mode selected on Stormscope®page.

Yellow on cyan Stormscope®information being received and displayed.

Strikes have occurred within 25 nm.

Black on gray Stormscope®information being received but not dis-

played.

Yellow on gray Stormscope®information being received but not dis-

played. Strikes have occurred within 25 nm.

Black on gray with red

slash

Stormscope®information not being received; data is

invalid.

1-7

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

VDL Icon XM Icon Colors Description

Black on a cyan

background.

No weather data is currently being

received but previously received data is

being displayed on the present page.

Black on a cyan

background.

Weather data is currently being received

from a signal and displayed on the pre-

sent page. XM signal is weak.

Black on a cyan

background.

Weather data is currently being received

from a signal and displayed on the pre-

sent page. XM signal is marginal.

Black on a cyan

background.

Weather data is currently being received

from a signal and displayed on the pre-

sent page. XM signal is good.

Black on gray. Weather data not being received nor dis-

played on the present page.

Black on gray. Weather data is currently being received

from a signal but not displayed on the

present page.

Black on gray with

red slash

Fault with connection or data link radio.

General Information

1-8

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

General Information

STARTUP DISPLAYS

At power-up, the startup logo displays will be seen.

If Stormscope® is installed with the

system, a display similar to the one at

the right will be seen.

After the completion of the Self Test,

press the OK Softkey.

One of the following Instrument Panel Self Test Pages will be displayed

depending on whether the unit is equipped with an internal GPS or is the

non-GPS version.

Non-GPS KMD 250 KMD 250 with Internal GPS

1-9

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Verify that the Message and Waypoint Alert annunciator lamps are on.

These annunciators are external to the KMD 250, mounted elsewhere

on the instrument panel as shown

here represented as MSG and

WPT. However, they are optional

and may not be installed. Verify

the GPS ALTITUDE (BARO ALTI-

TUDE will be displayed if the

system is configured to use a baro-

metric altitude source) is consistent with the altimeter. If the KMD 250 is

configured to use the optional internal GPS as “sole source” or “backup”

verify the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) is showing half scale right

deflection with a FROM indication. If all is correct after verification, press

the OK Softkey.

One of the following caution screens will now be displayed depending on

whether the unit is the non-GPS version or the unit is equipped with the

internal GPS . Acknowledge by pressing the OK Softkey.

Acknowledge the next caution page

by pressing the OK Softkey.

The KMD 250 is now ready for use

and will be showing the VFR Map

Display.

Non-GPS KMD 250

Typical External Annunciator Unit

KMD 250 with Internal GPS

General Information

1-10

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

General Information

POP-UP HELP DISPLAYS

Pop-up status displays are shown

if a Function Select Key is pressed

and held for longer than 2 seconds.

These can help provide a refer-

ence for monitoring the status of

selected functions. The first

example is a MAP Function Select

Key pop-up. Second is the pop-up

displayed when pressing and

holding the WX Function Select

Key.

POWER DOWN

When power is turned off a display

similar to that shown here will be

seen. The system will shut down

in 5 seconds. This allows for inad-

vertently turning off the system.

Push the ON/OFF/Brightness

Control back in before the count-

down is over and the system will

continue where it left off with no

loss of data.

DATA FIELDS

Data Fields may be used to display various types of information in win-

dows on the left side of the screen, as shown here. This makes it easy

to get quick access to desired information.

The Data Fields can be turned on or off and customized separately in

each of the MAP, WX or TRFC Displays. The system will remember the

last selected parameters in each function display and will maintain this

configuration until changed.

Power Down Display

Weather Display Pop-Up Help

Map Display Pop-Up Help

1-11

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Each field can be customized to display any of the following:

NOTE: Some fields may not have valid data depending on the installa-

tion.

The CDI (Course Deviation Indicator) Display has scaling of 5nm, 1nm

and .3nm depending on the setting on the Navigation Setup Page (see

Navigation Setup in this section).

Map Display-Data Fields OffMap Display-Data Fields On

ALT Altitude

BRG Bearing to Waypoint

CDI Course Deviation Indicator

DIS Distance to Waypoint

DEP TIME Departure Time

DTK Desired Track

ESA En Route Safe Altitude

ETA WPT Estimated Time of Arrival at Waypoint

ETE WPT Estimated Time Enroute to Waypoint

FLT TIME Flight Time

GNDSPD Ground Speed

HEADING Heading

MSA Minimum Safe Altitude

NEAR POS Near Position Display

PPOS Present Position

TIME Time

TKE Track Angle Error

TRFC Traffic

TRK Actual Track

WPT Active Waypoint

XTK Cross Track Error

General Information

1-12

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

General Information

The Near Position (NEAR POS) display is intended to provide an easy

method of reporting aircraft position to Air Traffic Control. This is done

by always displaying the nearest reporting position to the aircraft’s pre-

sent position in the Data Field. The position criteria can be set to display

the nearest VORs, VORs plus airports or all data (airports, VORs,

VOR/DME, VORTAC, NDB, VRP). Settings are made on the Navigation

Setup Page discussed later in this section.

To turn the Data Fields on or off,

perform the follow steps:

1. Press the MENU Key to dis-

play Figure 1-1.

2. Press the CHANGE FIELDS

Softkey to display Figure 1-2. If

the Data Fields were on to begin

with, a FIELDS OFF Softkey will

be available. If the Data Fields

were off, a FIELDS ON Softkey

will be available. Pressing this

Softkey will toggle the Data Fields

on and off.

3. When finished press the

DONE Softkey.

To change Data Fields, perform

the follow steps:

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 above.

With the Data Fields turned on,

use the Joystick to select the

desired Data Field as shown in

Figure 1-3. In this case the top

Data Field is selected and displays

BRG as indicated in the list.

2. When the desired Data Field

is selected, use the Rotary Knob to

select data from the list to be dis-

played in that Data Field.

These settings will be maintained

until changed by the user.

3. When finished press the DONE

Softkey.

Pressing the RESTORE DEFAULT Softkey will reset the Data Fields

back to the factory settings.

Figure 1-1

Figure 1-2

Figure 1-3

1-13

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)

A Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)

graphically displays left and right

deviation from a desired course. A

CDI can be displayed in any of the

Data Fields as shown in Figure 1-

4. The CDI’s vertical bar operates

like a navigation deviation needle

on a conventional CDI or HSI

using VOR/Localizer navigation.

An on-course indication is dis-

played when the vertical deviation

bar is centered on the triangle in the

middle of the CDI. In enroute use,

each dot represents one nautical

mile deviation from the desired

track (full scale deviation is ± 5

NM). Different CDI scales can be

set on the Navigation Setup Page.

A vertical deviation bar positioned

two dots to the right of the center

triangle indicates the aircraft is two

nautical miles to the left of course

as shown in Figure 1-5. The center

triangle also serves as the CDI’s

TO/FROM indicator and operates

in the same manner as a conven-

tional CDI TO/FROM indicator; a

triangle pointing up indicates “to”

the active waypoint while a “down” triangle

(Figure 1-6) indicates “from” the active waypoint.

The word FLAG is displayed over the CDI when

the CDI is not usable for navigation as seen in

Figure 1-7.

Figure 1-4

Figure 1-6

Figure 1-7

TUL

CNU

2 NM

Figure 1-5

General Information

1-14

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

General Information

GREAT CIRCLE COURSES AND MAGNETIC VARIATION

Due to “great circle” courses and magnetic variation differences between

present position and the active waypoint, the To bearing and From radial

may not be exactly 180° different from each other. This condition is

most likely to occur when long distances are involved, and/or you are

operating in very northerly or southerly latitudes.

See Figure 1-8 for an example depicting a case like this. The aircraft is

somewhere over Georgia, and the active waypoint is KPHX. The bearing

to steer is 269°, and radial is 72°. Generally, bearing (not radial) will be

used when long distances are involved.

MINIMUM AND ENROUTE SAFE ALTITUDE

The Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA) displayed is the altitude defined by

Jeppesen as “Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude (Grid MORA)”. This alti-

tude is derived by Jeppesen for sectors which are one degree of latitude

by one degree of longitude in size. One degree of latitude is 60 nautical

miles. One degree of longitude is 60 nautical miles at the equator and

progressively less than 60 nautical miles as one travels away from the

equator. One degree of longitude is approximately 50 nautical miles at

the southern most parts of the U.S. and is approximately 40 nautical

miles at the northern most parts of the U.S. The MSA altitude informa-

tion is contained in the database and is updated when the datacard is

updated.

KPHX

72°

269°

Figure 1-8

1-15

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

The MSA provides “reference point” clearance within these one degree

latitude by one degree longitude sectors. Jeppesen defines a reference

point as “a natural (Peak, Knoll, Hill, etc.) or man-made (Tower, Stack,

Tank, Building, etc.) object”. Jeppesen states the following about the

Grid Minimum Off-Route altitude: “Grid MORA values clear all reference

points by 1000 feet in areas where the highest reference points are 5000

feet MSL or lower. MORA values clear all reference points by 2000 feet

in areas where the highest reference points are 5001 feet MSL or

higher”. The KMD 250 displays dashes for areas outside the database

coverage area or for areas where the Grid MORA is not defined.

The Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA) is the highest MSA sector altitude from

the present position to the active waypoint, then to the destination way-

point along the active flight plan. See Figure 1-9. When the KMD 250 is

in the OBS Course Mode, the minimum en route safe altitude is the

highest MSA sector altitude from the present position to the active way-

point.

CAUTION

The MSA and ESA altitudes displayed are advisory only. They

should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and ter-

rain avoidance information. Refer to current aeronautical charts for

appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.

Figure 1-9

MSA (MSL)

ESA (MSL)

1° LONG.

1°

LAT.

General Information

1-16

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

General Information

INTERNAL GPS STATUS

For an overview on how the

Global Positioning System works,

refer to Appendix C, GPS Primer.

Such parameters as present posi-

tion, altitude, date, time, satellite

state, DOP, satellites tracked,

signal strength and elevation for

the internal GPS can be monitored

on the Internal GPS Status Page.

To access this page perform the

following:

1. Press the MENU Key to dis-

play Figure 1-10.

2. Press the AUX MENU Softkey

to display Figure 1-11.

3. Using the Rotary Knob or the

Joystick to select Internal GPS

Status as shown in Figure 1-11.

4. Press the SELECT Softkey to

display Figure 1-12.

5. Press the RCVR INFO

Softkey to view information such

as the GPS receiver software part

number, software version, soft-

ware revision and serial number

as shown in Figure 1-13.

QUICKTUNE™

The KMD 250 is capable of tuning

the KX 155A/165A Nav/Comm.

The KMD 250 is capable of tuning

up to four Nav/Comm systems,

depending on the installation. Use

of this feature will be discussed

later in Map Operation and Flight

Planning.

Figure 1-11

Figure 1-12

Figure 1-13

Figure 1-10

1-17 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

MAP OPERATION

The following illustration describes the data that appears on the Map

Display.

1 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and

displayed as well as sensor status.

2 Data Fields - These can be turned on or off. Each of the 5 windows can

be set to display one of the following; ALT, BRG, CDI, DIS, DEP TIME, DTK,

ESA, ETA WPT, ETE WPT, FLT TIME, GNDSPD, HEADING, MSA, NEAR

POS, PPOS, TIME, TKE, TRFC, TRK, WPT, XTK.

3 North Pointer

4 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position. Stylized airplane when heading

or track input is present, a plus symbol with no heading or track.

5 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is one

half the selected range.

6 RESET STICK Soft Label

7 Traffic Symbol Overlay - Displayed when traffic avoidance system is installed.

8 Graphical METAR Icon Overlay - Displayed when FIS is installed and

subscription is valid.

9 LEGEND Soft Label

10 Current MAP Selection - VFR MAP (absolute altitude terrain shading), IFR

MAP (no terrain shading) or Relative Terrain Map (relative altitude terrain

shading).

11 Display Range - RNG:####.

345

Map Operation

1-18 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

SELECTING A MAP DISPLAY

Press the MAP Function Select Key to sequence through the VFR Map,

IFR Map and Relative Terrain Map Display. With the IFR Map displayed,

no topographic data is displayed. With the Relative Terrain Map dis-

played, topographic data is displayed as colors corresponding to eleva-

tion relative to the aircraft’s present altitude. See Tables 1-1 and 1-2 on

Absolute and Relative Altitudes.

VFR MAP

With the VFR Map displayed,

topographic data is displayed

as colors corresponding to the

absolute altitude stored in the

database (see Figure 1-14).

The VFR Map displays terrain

similar to a VFR sectional

chart. Table 1-1 shows the

levels and terrain shading used

on the VFR Map.

A color key can be displayed

by moving the Joystick Pointer

pressing the LEGEND Softkey

as shown in Figure 1-15. To

exit, press the CLEAR Softkey

then press the RESET STICK

Softkey.

Figure 1-14 - VFR Map

Figure 1-15

Absolute Terrain Color Key

☞

Relative Terrain

Map

VFR Map

IFR Map

1-19 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

IFR MAP

Terrain is not displayed on the

IFR Map display as shown in

Figure 1-16. In addition, all

built up or urban areas are

shaded light gray. Oceans,

rivers and lakes are blue.

RELATIVE TERRAIN MAP

With Relative Terrain Map dis-

played, topographic data and

obstructions are displayed as

colors corresponding to eleva-

tion relative to the aircraft’s

present altitude as shown in

Figure 1-17. This feature is

useful in providing awareness

to possible terrain hazards at

the present aircraft altitude.

Table 1-2 shows the levels and

terrain shading used on the

Relative Terrain Map.

Figure 1-16 - IFR Map

Figure 1-17 - Relative Terrain Map

Absolute Terrain Altitude (feet) Color

13000+ Dark Brown

11500-12999 ⇓

10000-11499 ⇓

9000-9999 ⇓

8000-8999 ⇓

7000-7999 Light Brown

6000-6999 Dark Tan

5000-5999 ⇓

4000-4999 ⇓

3000-3999 ⇓

2500-2999 ⇓

2000-2499 Light Tan

1500-1999 Dark Green

1000-1499 ⇓

500-999 ⇓

<499 Light Green

Water Blue

Table 1-1 Absolute Terrain (VFR Map)

Map Operation

1-20 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

A color key can be displayed by

moving the Joystick Pointer and

pressing the LEGEND Softkey.

Notice there are two legends when

viewing the Relative Terrain Map

Display. The first page shows the

color key for terrain (Figure 1-18)

and the second (Figure 1-19)

shows the color key for obstacles.

The airplane icon conveys what

colors would be below current air-

craft altitude and what would be

above. The airplane icon itself,

however, does not represent current aircraft altitude. Press the NEXT

and PREV Softkeys to toggle between the two displays. To exit, press

the CLEAR Softkey then press the RESET STICK Softkey.

Figure 1-20 depicts obstacles displayed on the Relative Terrain Map.

Note the differences in color between terrain and obstacles based on an

aircraft altitude of 2,000 ft MSL. Obstacles are enhanced on the Relative

Aircraft Altitude Relative to

Terrain (feet)

Aircraft Altitude Relative to

Obstacle (feet) Color

250 ft. or more below sur-

rounding terrain 250 ft. or less above obstacle

Between 249 ft. below & 250

ft. above surrounding terrain

Between 251 ft. & 750 ft.

above obstacle

Between 251 ft. & 750 ft.

above surrounding terrain

Between 751 ft. & 1250 ft.

above obstacle

Between 751 ft. & 1250 ft.

above surrounding terrain

Between 1251 ft. & 1750 ft.

above obstacle

Between 1251 ft. & 2000 ft.

above surrounding terrain

Between 1751 ft. & 2000 ft.

above obstacle

2001 ft. or more above sur-

rounding terrain

2001 ft. or more above

obstacle 100% Black

Table 1-2 Relative Terrain and Obstacles (Relative Terrain Map)

Figure 1-19

Relative Obstacle Color Key

Figure 1-20

Figure 1-18

Relative Terrain Color Key

1-21 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

Terrain display to provide situational awareness by displaying a 1/2 nm

ring around the obstacle. For example, the obstacles displayed with a

red ring, as shown in Figure 1-20, are easily identifiable and are within

250 ft. of the present aircraft altitude.

NOTE: The color scale for obstacles is more severe than terrain so that

they stand out on the map.

CAUTION

NEVER USE THE TOPOGRAPHIC ELEVATION DISPLAYED ON

THIS EQUIPMENT AS YOUR SOLE REFERENCE FOR TERRAIN

AVOIDANCE.

The KMD 250 must be receiving altitude information from an altitude

source for the Relative Terrain Map to function. Altitude sources may be

GPS altitude, pressure altitude (ARINC 429 or Gillham) or baro-cor-

rected altitude. The altitude

source options are determined

at installation. If no altitude

information is received a cau-

tion will be displayed as in

Figure 1-21.

NOTE: If a baro-corrected or

pressure altitude source is

used, the Relative Terrain Map

may not display colors accu-

rately in operations above

18,000 feet when the altimeter

setting is 29.92 in. Hg.

Baro Correction

If the altitude information

source is Gillham pressure alti-

tude, then a baro correction

must be entered manually. If

the baro correction is not kept

current the Relative Terrain

Map will not display the proper

color coding for the aircraft’s

actual altitude.

When on the Relative Terrain

Map the KMD 250 will prompt for an entry every 30 minutes as shown in

Figure 1-22. Turn the Rotary Knob to enter the desired barometric set-

ting. After the desired setting is entered, press the OK Softkey.

NOTE: The manual baro correction entry must be kept current on both

the KMD 250 and the altimeter for the Relative Terrain Map to function

properly.

Figure 1-21

Figure 1-22

Map Operation

1-22 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

The baro correction may also

be entered through the AUX

MENU as follows:

1. Press the MENU Key to

display the Menu Softkeys as

in Figure 1-23.

2. Press the AUX MENU

Softkey to display Figure 1-24.

Use the Joystick to select Baro

Entry as shown.

3. Press the SELECT

Softkey and Figure 1-25 will be

displayed.

4. Turn the Rotary Knob to

select the desired entry.

5. Press the OK Softkey.

OBSTACLE LABELS

Obstacles are labeled with two

numbers. The first number is

the height of the obstacle in

FEET ABOVE MSL. The

second number (in brackets) is

the height of the obstacle in

FEET AGL.

Figure 1-24

Figure 1-25

Figure 1-23

1-23 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

USING THE MAP

After power-up, the map

will initially be displayed at

a range setting of 20nm.

If there is no valid GPS or

FMS position fix data

available, the words

CAUTION, No position

data will be shown across

the center of the display in

a box as seen in Figure 1-

26. If the fix is lost at any time during normal operation of the unit, the

same CAUTION, No position data box will be overlayed on the map.

CAUTION: Do not use the map for navigation while this notification

is displayed.

The map will be shown in either North Up, Track Up or Heading Up

orientation depending upon the setting selected in the Map Setup and is

reflected by the North Pointer in the upper left of the display.

The displayed data is updated every second. Press the

RNG ΔΔ(range up) or RNG ∇∇(range down) key at any time

to zoom the map in and out to whichever one of the twelve

pre-set scales desired. The available range settings are 1,

2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 500 and

1000 nm. The levels of detail appearing at each zoom

level can be changed in the Map Setup menu. See Map

Setup.

When active, Auto Zoom automatically adjusts the range setting up or

down as needed to keep the flight plan active waypoint within the view-

able area of the Map display.

Auto Zoom is enabled in either of the following ways:

1. Pressing RNG ∇∇ past the

minimum setting of 1 nm.

2. Pressing and holding

either RNG Key for 2 seconds

or more. While Auto Zoom is

enabled, AUTO is displayed in

light blue text above the current

range setting (see Figure 1-

27).

Auto Zoom will be canceled if

the flight plan becomes invalid

or either RNG Key is pressed.

Figure 1-26

Figure 1-27

Map Operation

1-24 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

MAP DATA

INTERROGATION

As soon as the joystick is

moved, a display similar to

Figure 1-28 will be displayed.

The map freezes in its present

position with respect to the

joystick pointer (inset). The

reason the map is made to

stop moving is that this makes

accurate positioning of the joy-

stick pointer much easier.

The aircraft icon will still be

displayed in the proper loca-

tion and will move in relation

to the stationary map.

The latitude and longitude of

the pointer position is dis-

played at the bottom of the

display. The bearing (PBRG)

and distance (PDIS) are also

displayed. These show the

distance and bearing from the

aircraft present position to the

joystick pointer. This function

can be used to measure dis-

tance and bearing to any point

on the map. The window

formed by the extremities of

the display can be moved

(panned) around the map by

"bumping" the display borders

left, right, up or down with the

pointer. The RNG ΔΔand RNG

∇∇keys can still be used to

zoom the map in and out.

Press RESET STICK and the

joystick pointer will vanish, the display will return to the moving map,

and the map will be placed back in its present position at the zoom

level that was selected prior to activating the joystick. If the joystick is

not moved for 30 seconds, the display will time-out back to the moving

map.

In addition to finding it useful for measuring distances and bearings,

the joystick can be used for other tasks. By placing the pointer over

any data icon a window will pop up similar to that shown in Figure 1-

29. Pressing the MORE INFO Softkey, a display similar to Figure 1-30

will appear.

Figure 1-29

Figure 1-30

Figure 1-28

1-25 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

Press the CLEAR Softkey to return to the map display.

If the FIS INFO Softkey is pressed, the textual METAR page will be

displayed for the closest reporting station to the current selection.

AIRPORT INFORMATION

As shown in Figure 1-31, you

can display airport information

by placing the joystick pointer

over an airport icon. Pressing

the MORE INFO Softkey will

display more detailed runway

information as shown in

Figure 1-32. The RNG Keys

can be used to zoom in or out

on the airport diagram. The

information given here is

derived from the database.

The airport type is shown to

the right of the airport identifier

(KOSH). The airport type is

either MILITARY, PRIVATE

or blank for others (public).

The airport elevation (808ft) is

shown to the right of the air-

port type. Runway orientation

and lengths are displayed to

the right of the airport dia-

gram. Runway surfaces are

shown as an Hfor hard and

an Sfor soft. Lighting is

shown as an Lfor lit and a U

for unlit.

Pressing the NEXT Softkey

will display more details like

radio frequencies and ser-

vices, similar to Figure 1-33.

In the window with the airport

identifier, airport airspace

information and approach

types will be shown. The next

window to the right shows the

difference between UTC and

local standard and daylight

times. The next window will display the available fuel types at this air-

port. See Figure 1-35 for details regarding these fields.

Figure 1-31

Figure 1-33

Figure 1-32

Map Operation

1-26 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

If the FIS INFO Softkey is pressed, the textual METAR page will be dis-

played with the current METAR report (if available) for this airport or

the nearest report to the airport.

Pressing the QUICK TUNE

Softkey will tune the appro-

priate KX 155A/165A

Nav/Comm to the selected

frequency. Use the Joystick

or Rotary Knob to place the

cursor over the desired fre-

quency in the list. If the

system contains only one KX

155A/165A, simply pressing

the QUICK TUNE Softkey will

tune the Nav/Comm to the

selected frequency. If multiple

KX 155A/165A systems are contained in the installation, pressing the

QUICK TUNE Softkey will display the Nav or Comm selection display

as shown in Figure 1-34. Use the Joystick or Rotary Knob to select the

desired Nav or Comm for tuning. Press the OK Softkey to tune the

radio.

Figure 1-34

1-27 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

NAVAID INFORMATION

As explained previously, you

can access additional Navaid

information by placing the joy-

stick pointer over a VOR or

NDB icon to display informa-

tion similar to Figure 1-35.

Pressing the MORE INFO

Softkey will display more infor-

mation as in Figure 1-36. Full

details of the Navaid are listed,

Figure 1-36

Figure 1-35 Airport Info Field Definitions

1 Airport ICAO Identifier

2 Airspace Enviroment - The following may be displayed in this field:

CL B Class B airspace

CL C Class C airspace

CTA Control Area

TMA Terminal Area

TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area

3 Non GPS Approach Availability - The following may be displayed in this

field:

NO APR No approaches are available

NP APR Non-precision approach available

MLS MLS approach available

ILS ILS approach available

ILS/MLS ILS and MLS approaches available

4 GPS Approach Availability - If an approved non-precision GPS approach

is available GPS will be displayed.

5 Comm Frequency List - Lists the available communications frequencies for

the airport being displayed. See Appendix A for abbreviations.

6 Fuel Availability - The following fuel types may be displayed:

80 80 to 87 octane

100 100 to 130 octane

100LL 100 octane, low lead

JET Jet fuel, any type

AUTO Automotive fuel (also known as MOGAS)

7 Time Zone - Displays the difference between local standard time and UTC

for the selected airport. The difference in local daylight time and UTC is in

parenthesis.

8 Radar Indicator - If (R) is displayed, this indicates an approach/departure

radar environment.

Map Operation

1-28 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Operation

Rev 2 Apr2004

type, frequency and ident as

shown in Figure 1-37.

As discussed previously in

Airport Information, pressing

the QUICK TUNE Softkey will

tune the appropriate KX

155A/165A Nav/Comm to the

navaid frequency. If the

system contains only one KX

155A/165A, simply pressing

the QUICK TUNE Softkey will

tune the Nav radio. If multiple

KX 155A/165A systems are

contained in the installation,

pressing the QUICK TUNE

Softkey will display the Nav

selection display as shown in

Figure 1-38. Use the Joystick

or Rotary Knob to select the

desired Nav or Comm for

tuning. Press the OK Softkey

to tune the radio.

AIRSPACE

INTERROGATION

In order to interrogate a piece

of airspace on the Map display,

move the joystick pointer to

one of the airspace boundaries

to display an information

window as shown in Figure 1-

39.

IMPORTANT:

When a single airspace

boundary line is shared by

two different pieces of air-

space (which is very common), the airspace with the lower vertical

limit will always be highlighted.

Once it is determined the piece of airspace highlighted is the piece for

which information is wanted (you may have to zoom out to verify this, but

beware, some airspace switches off as you zoom out dependent on the

settings made in Map Setup), press the MORE INFO Softkey and addi-

tional information will be displayed as in Figure 1-40.

Figure 1-37

Figure 1-38

Figure 1-39

1-29 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

The information shown on this

display is all the information

from the internal database that

is relevant to the airspace

selected. If some of the fields

are blank or say SEE CHART,

this means that Jeppesen data

is not available for that partic-

ular item.

As discussed previously,

pressing the QUICK TUNE

Softkey will tune the appro-

priate KX 155A/165A

Nav/Comm to the selected fre-

quency. Use the Joystick or

Rotary Knob to place the

cursor over the desired fre-

quency in the list. If the

system contains only one KX

155A/165A, simply pressing

the QUICK TUNE Softkey will

tune the Comm to the

selected frequency. If multiple

KX 155A/165A systems are

contained in the installation,

pressing the QUICK TUNE

Softkey will display the Comm selection display as shown in Figure 1-

35. Use the Joystick or Rotary Knob to select the desired Comm for

tuning. Press the OK Softkey to tune the radio.

AIRSPACE ALERTING

The Special Use Airspace (SUA) alert feature is three dimensional. The

SUA areas are stored in the KMD 250 database with regard to altitude

when the actual SUA altitude limitations are charted in terms of mean

sea level (MSL). However, if the actual lower limit of an SUA is charted

in terms of an altitude above ground level (AGL), then it is stored in the

database as all altitude below the upper limit of the SUA. If the actual

upper limit of an SUA is charted in terms of AGL, it is stored in the data-

base as “unlimited”.

If the altitude input to the KMD 250 is pressure altitude from an altitude

encoder or air data computer, then you must manually update the KMD

250 with an altimeter setting (Baro Correction) in order to receive accu-

rate SUA alerting. See the discussion on Baro Correction earlier in this

section. It is a good idea to update the Baro Correction each time you

make a change to the aircraft’s altimeter setting.

Figure 1-41

Figure 1-40

Map Operation

1-30 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

NOTE: If there is no altitude input to the KMD 250, all altitudes will be

regarded as being within the boundary of the SUA area.

The message prompt for a special use airspace alert will occur when the

aircraft’s position is at a point such that a projection of the aircraft’s

existing track over the ground is approximately 10 minutes from pene-

trating the outer boundary of one of these areas. It will also occur if the

aircraft is within approxi-

mately two nautical miles of

one of these areas even if

the aircraft’s projected track

over the ground won’t actu-

ally penetrate the SUA area

(see Figure 1-42). If one of

the SUA areas is penetrated,

another message will state:

Inside SUA.

The SUA alert feature may

be disabled (or enabled) on

the Navigation Setup Page.

See Navigation Setup later

in this section.

If the SUA alert feature has been enabled, the KMD 250 allows selection

of a vertical buffer on the in order to provide an additional layer of protec-

tion from inadvertently entering an SUA. The vertical buffer serves to

“stretch” the SUA area in both directions (up and down) by the selected

buffer altitude. For example, a buffer of 1,000 feet is selected and the

actual SUA area exists from 5,000 feet MSL to 12,000 feet MSL. In this

case SUA alert messages are displayed if the aircraft enters the lateral

boundary at any altitude between 4,000 and 13,000 feet MSL.

CAUTION

It is the pilot’s responsibility to avoid special use airspace where

ATC clearance to penetrate is required but has not been obtained.

The airspace alert is only a tool to assist the pilot and should never

be relied upon as the sole means of avoiding these areas.

Figure 1-42

10 MIN

2 MILES

1-31 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

When SUA Alerting is enabled,

an Airspace Alert message will

be provided when the aircraft is

approximately 10 minutes or 2

miles (depending on ground

speed) from entering the air-

space boundary. When an

Airspace Alert message is

given, MESSAGE PRESS

MENU will flash at the bottom

of the display as shown in

Figure 1-43.

Pressing the MENU Key will

display the message as shown

in Figure 1-44. Press the OK

Softkey to exit the message.

To enable or disable SUA

Alerting perform the following:

1. Press the MENU Key.

Press the AUX MENU Softkey

to display Figure 1-45.

2. Use the Rotary Knob or

the Joystick to place the cursor

over Navigation Setup as

shown in Figure 1-45.

Figure 1-45

Figure 1-44

Figure 1-43

Map Operation

1-32 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

3. Press the SELECT Softkey

to display Figure 1-46.

4. Press the NEXT Softkey to

display Figure 1-47.

5. Use the Joystick to place

the cursor in the selection field

for SUA Alerting.

6. Use the Rotary Knob to

select On or Off.

7. When On is selected the

SUA Alerting Buffer will be

editable. Use the Joystick to

place the cursor over this field

(see Figure 1-48) and use the

Rotary Knob to select the

desired altitude. An Airspace

Alert message will be given

when the aircraft enters within

this selected buffer altitude

from the published SUA alti-

tude boundary. For example: if

the published upper SUA

boundary is 3,000 feet and a

buffer altitude of 1,000 feet is

selected, the Airspace Alert will

be issued when the aircraft

descends to 4,000 feet and is

within the lateral SUA bound-

aries.

Figure 1-46

Figure 1-47

Figure 1-48

1-33 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

DISPLAY FLIGHT PLAN

DATA ON MAP

If a host GPS is outputting data

in the Bendix/King equivalent

ARNAV R-30 (RS232) data

sentence format, in LEG mode,

the active flight plan will be

sent to the KMD 250 and is dis-

played as an overlay on the

map as shown in Figure 1-49.

If a KLN 94 is supplying the

GPS data, and the KLN 94 is

configured to produce the

“Enhanced RS-232 GPS bus”,

the KMD 250 will display the

curved paths including DME

arcs, Procedure Turns and

Holding Patterns. Figure 1-50

shows an example.

If another type of GPS is used,

then during the curved flight

segments of approaches (i.e.

DME arcs, procedural turns

and holds) most GPS units

stop outputting flight plan data but continue to output positional data.

During a DME arc or procedural turn, the KMD 250 will continue to show

position, track and ground speed but the curved line depicting the arc or

turn will not be displayed. In OBS mode, some GPS units will not be

able to provide flight plan data. Present position is still provided and

flight plans will be displayed as soon as the mode is returned to LEG.

CAUTION

In the case of DME arcs, turns and holds, some GPS units send the

flight plan information as if there was no arc or curved flight path.

Therefore the KMD 250 has no option but to connect the beginning

and end waypoints of the arc or curve with a straight line. Under

these circumstances the line on the KMD 250 MUST BE IGNORED.

Figure 1-49

Figure 1-50

Map Operation

1-34 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

TEMPORARILY DECLUT-

TERING THE MAP

Sometimes it is necessary to

temporarily reduce the amount

of data displayed on the map in

order to make it more readable.

This is known as decluttering.

Perform the following steps

until the desired level declut-

tering is achieved.

1. Press the MENU Key to

display the DECLUTTER

Softkey as shown in Figure 1-

51.

2. Press the DECLUTTER

Softkey. On the first press the

land data will be removed from

the display as seen in Figure 1-

52. Notice roads, railways, city

icons, etc. are no longer dis-

played. Note also that a -L is

now shown in the bottom left of

the screen indicating the dis-

play is minus land data.

3. Press the DECLUTTER

Softkey again. On the second

press the aeronautical data will

be removed from the display

as seen in Figure 1-53. Notice

airports, airspace boundaries,

etc. are no longer displayed.

Note also that a -A is now

added in the bottom left of the

screen indicating the display is

also minus aeronautical data in

addition to land data.

Figure 1-52

Figure 1-51

Figure 1-53

1-35 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

4. Press the DECLUTTER

Softkey again. The third press

will now restore the land data

as seen in Figure 1-54. Note

that the -L is no longer shown

in the bottom left of the screen

indicating land data is now

being displayed.

5. Press the DECLUTTER

Softkey again. The fourth

press will now restore the

aeronautical data.

When leaving the Map display to view another function, all data will be

restored.

FIND NEAREST (UNITS WITHOUT INTERNAL GPS)

Find Nearest allows the user to find the airport, VOR, NDB, intersection

or user entered waypoint closest to the aircraft’s present position. Up to

20 of the find criteria may be listed and must be within 200nm of the air-

craft’s position. The closest will be listed first, the furthest listed last.

1. Press the NRST Key to

display the FIND NEAREST

display as shown in Figure 1-

55. In this case a list of air-

ports is displayed.

2. If more information on a

particular airport is desired, use

the Joystick or Rotary Knob to

place the cursor over the

desired airport identifier and

press the MORE INFO Softkey.

Information on the selected air-

port will be displayed as in

Figure 1-56. Press the NEXT

Softkey to display more infor-

mation. Press the CLEAR

Softkey to return to the FIND

NEAREST display.

Figure 1-55

Figure 1-54

Figure 1-56

Map Operation

1-36 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

3. To change to one of the

other Find parameters, press

the NEAREST TYPE Softkey

to display the SELECT

NEAREST TYPE window as

shown in Figure 1-57.

4. Use the Joystick or Rotary

Knob to place the cursor over

the desired Find type.

5. Press the OK Softkey.

6. If Airports is selected as

the type (as in Figure 1-57),

pressing the AIRPORT

FILTER Softkey (Figure 1-58)

will display the AIRPORT

FILTER CRITERIA Window

as shown in Figure 1-59.

7. The listed airports can be

filtered by runway length and

runway type. Use the Joystick

to place the cursor over the

desired field and use the

Rotary Knob select the the

desired value. When finished

press the OK Softkey.

Figure 1-57

Figure 1-58

Figure 1-59

1-37 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

FIND NEAREST (UNITS

WITH INTERNAL GPS)

As discussed previously, Find

Nearest allows the user to find

the airport, VOR, NDB, inter-

section or user entered way-

point closest to the aircraft’s

present position. Up to 20 of

the find criteria may be listed

and must be within 200nm of

the aircraft’s position. The

closest will be listed first, the

furthest listed last.

1. Press the Direct-To (D)

Key to display the DIRECT TO

window. If the KMD 250 is not

presently navigating using the

internal GPS, but is displaying

information coming from an

external GPS source, Figure 1-

60 will be displayed. This is a

prompt to indicate the Direct-To

function is not available when

using an external GPS source.

However, this will not

affect the Find Nearest

feature. Press the OK

Softkey to display the

FIND NEAREST display.

The Find Nearest feature

is now used as discussed

previously.

If the KMD 250 is

presently navigating using

the internal GPS, Figure 1-

60 will not be displayed and

Figure 1-61 will be shown

immediately upon pressing the Direct-To Key.

2. Press the NEAREST Softkey to go to the FIND NEAREST display

as shown in Figure 1-62. The balance of the Find Nearest feature func-

tions as discussed previously.

Figure 1-61

Figure 1-62

Figure 1-60

Map Operation

1-38 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

WAYPOINT ALERT

The Waypoint Alert will flash

the next desired track (NEXT

DTK) when the estimated time

to the next waypoint is about

15 seconds as shown in Figure

1-63. Turning to establish the

NEXT DTK will aid in inter-

cepting the next leg of the flight

plan.

If the waypoint is being dis-

played in a Data Field the WPT field will flash annunciating the Waypoint

Alert.

When viewing the Flight Plan Page the arrow indicating the current leg

will flash to annunciate the Waypoint Alert.

If an external Waypoint Alert annunciator is installed in the aircraft, it will

also flash.

TURN ANTICIPATION

When Turn Anticipation is

enabled in Navigation Setup, it

will provide turn guidance to a

new course for intercepting the

next leg of the flight plan.

Waypoint Alerting will begin

when the estimated time to the

start of the turn is about 20

seconds. As previously dis-

cussed, the Waypoint Alert will

be annunciated by flashing the

next desired track (NEXT

DTK) window as in Figure 1-

64. When the computed turn

point is reached TURN TO will

displayed as shown in Figure

1-65. The required bank angle

to follow the arc will normally

be between 3° and 25°

depending on aircraft speed

and the amount of course

change.

Figure 1-65

Figure 1-64

Figure 1-63

1-39 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

Turn Anticipation will be inhibited if the angle between the legs is less

than 5° or greater than 175° or the Crosstrack Error (XTK) is greater than

4 nm.

To utilize the Turn Anticipation feature, start the turn transition to the next

leg in the flight plan at the very beginning of the computed turn point.

Upon reaching this computed turn point the Waypoint Alert annunciator

will stop flashing and remain on steadily while the text “TURN TO” is dis-

played as shown in Figure 1-65.

If an autopilot is engaged, this is the time to change the selected course

on the CDI or HSI to that indicated next to TURN TO. In the case of

Figure 1-65 that would be 288° magnetic.

Map Operations

1-40 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Rev 2 Apr/2004

Intentionally left blank

Map Operation

1-41

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

USER WAYPOINTS

User waypoints can be entered as either user defined waypoints or as

airports. The KMD 250 allows for the programming of up to 1,000 user

waypoints. User waypoints are stored on the KMD 250 data card and

can be transferred to a new data card when installed.

These waypoints can be used for flight plans if the KMD 250 contains the

optional internal GPS, but only if the internal GPS is currently being used

for navigation. Flight plans running on an external GPS cannot utilize

waypoints stored in the KMD 250.

KMD 250 systems that do not have the internal GPS also allow user

waypoints to entered, but can only be used for marking points on the

map for such things as points of interest, landing locations not contained

in the database, etc.

ENTERING A USER WAYPOINT

The following illustration describes the User Waypoint Edit display.

User Waypoints

1 Waypoint Identifier - The system default will initially be USR000 and will increment with

each entered waypoint up to USR999. Any combination of alphanumeric characters

(up to six places) may be entered in place of the default.

2 1st Remarks Field - The default entry is current date. This field may be cleared and any

combination of up to 24 alphanumeric and punctuation characters may entered.

3 2nd Remarks Field - The default entry is current time. This field may be cleared and any

combination of up to 24 alphanumeric and punctuation characters may entered.

4 Waypoint Latitude/Longitude - Initially, the aircraft position at the time this display was

selected is entered here. This field may be changed to place the waypoint at different

location.

5 Place - A new waypoint is initially placed at the present position. An airport or navaid

identifier can also be entered to define the waypoint position as a bearing and distance from

the airport or navaid.

6 Bearing - Can indicate bearing from the current aircraft position to the waypoint, or

a bearing may be entered to define a waypoint position relative to an airport or navaid.

7 Distance - Can indicate distance from the current aircraft position to the waypoint,

or distance may be entered to define a waypoint position relative to an airport or navaid.

8 Waypoint Icon - Waypoint symbol that will be displayed on the map.

9 Waypoint Type - This field may be changed to indicate Waypoint or Airport depending

on the desired waypoint definition.

1-42

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

The following is a procedure

for entering new User

Waypoints.

1. Press the MENU Key to

display Figure 1-66. Press the

AUX MENU Softkey to display

Figure 1-67. Use the Joystick

or Rotary Knob to place the

cursor over User Waypoints

as seen in Figure 1-67.

2. Press the SELECT

Softkey to display the USER

WAYPOINT LIST display as

shown in Figure 1-68. Initially,

the list will be empty. As way-

points are entered the list will

be populated.

User Waypoints

Figure 1-68

Figure 1-66

Figure 1-67

1-43

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

3. Press the NEW WPT

Softkey to display the USER

WAYPOINT EDIT display as

shown in Figure 1-69.

The system default waypoint

identifier will be a naming con-

vention as shown in the IDENT

field. The default identifier will

increment starting with

USR000. The user can also

enter any identifier desired, but

limited to any combination of

six alphanumeric characters. If

the default identifier is accept-

able, proceed to step 5.

4. To enter a waypoint identi-

fier other than the system

default, turn the Rotary Knob

one increment and the first

character will be highlighted as

in Figure 1-70. If the desired

identifier is less than six char-

acters, press the CLEAR

IDENT Softkey to clear the

IDENT field. Otherwise, turn

the Rotary Knob to enter the

desired first character. Use the

Joystick to go to the next field

and again use the Rotary Knob

to enter the next desired char-

acter and so on until complete.

5. The current date and time

default to the two fields under

the waypoint identifier.

Remarks regarding the way-

point can be entered in these

fields in place of the date and

time.

If remarks are desired, use the Joystick to place the cursor on the first

line containing the date as shown in Figure 1-71.

User Waypoints

Figure 1-71

Figure 1-69

Figure 1-70

1-44

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

6. Turn the Rotary Knob one

increment to highlight the first

character on the line as in

Figure 1-72.

7. Press the CLEAR TEXT

Softkey to clear the field as

shown in Figure 1-73.

8. Turn the Rotary Knob to

enter the desired alphanumeric

or punctuation character.

9. Use the Joystick to move

the cursor to the next field.

Turn the Rotary Knob to enter

the desired character.

Continue in this manner to

enter any combination of

alphanumeric and punctuation

characters up to 24 characters

in length.

10. If a second line of remarks

is desired, use the Joystick as

discussed previously to place

the cursor over the second line.

Turn the Rotary Knob one

increment. Press the CLEAR

TEXT Softkey. Repeat steps 7

and 8 until all the desired char-

acters are entered (see Figure

1-74).

11. The default waypoint

POSITION is the aircraft posi-

tion at the time the USER

WAYPOINT EDIT display was

selected. The latitude and

longitude of the waypoint is

displayed. As the aircraft con-

tinues moving, the Present

Position is indicating the current bearing and distance to the waypoint

position. Note that these are changing as the aircraft moves.

12. A waypoint can be entered for any position. This can be done in two

ways. One way is by entering the desired latitude and longitude of the

waypoint. This is done by using the Joystick to place cursor over the

latitude/longitude field as shown in Figure 1-74. Turn the Rotary Knob

one increment to place the cursor on the first character. Continue

turning the Rotary Knob to enter an Nor S. Use the Joystick to move

User Waypoints

Figure 1-74

Figure 1-72

Figure 1-73

1-45

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

the cursor to the next field.

Again, use the Rotary Knob to

enter the desired number.

Repeat using the Joystick and

the Rotary Knob until the

desired latitude/longitude is

entered.

13. The second way to enter

the position of a waypoint is by

entering the bearing and dis-

tance from a known position,

such as an airport or navaid.

This is done by first using the

Joystick to place the cursor

over Present Position as

shown in Figure 1-75. Turn the

Rotary Knob one increment to

display the WAYPOINT

ENTRY window as shown in

Figure 1-76.

14. Use a combination of the

Joystick and Rotary Knob as

previously discussed to enter

the desired identifier of the air-

port or navaid as shown in

Figure 1-77. Note the bearing

and distance.

User Waypoints

Figure 1-75

Figure 1-76

Figure 1-77

1-46

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

15. Press the OK Softkey and

the selected identifier will be

entered into the PLACE field

as shown in Figure 1-78.

16. Use the Joystick to place

the cursor over the BEARING

field as in Figure 1-79.

17. Use the Rotary Knob to

enter the waypoint bearing

noted from the WAYPOINT

ENTRY Page.

18. In the same way as

entering the bearing, use the

Joystick to place the cursor

over the DISTANCE field.

19. Use the Rotary Knob to

enter the waypoint distance

noted from the WAYPOINT

ENTRY Page. Note that the

KMD 250 has also computed

the latitude/longitude for the

waypoint.

20. Press the SAVE & EXIT

Softkey.

Also, if a waypoint is defined by

entering the latitude/longitude

and an airport or navaid identi-

fier is then entered, the KMD

250 will compute the bearing

and distance of the waypoint

from the selected airport or

navaid.

After the waypoints are saved,

the User Waypoint List is dis-

played. Several waypoints

have been entered in the example in Figure 1-80. One is a User Entered

Airport, denoted by the airport icon (see Entering A User Airport). The

lock symbol indicates that the waypoint is part of a flight plan and cannot

be deleted until removed from the flight plan.

User Waypoints

Figure 1-78

Figure 1-79

Figure 1-80

1-47

Rev 4 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

ENTERING A USER AIRPORT

A User Airport is actually a User Waypoint to which additional airport

information may be added.

The first User Airport Edit display is used in the same way as the User

Waypoint Edit display as previously discussed. The following illustration

describes the second User Airport Edit display.

After entering the identifier,

remarks and position informa-

tion as discussed in steps 1

through 19 of Entering A User

Waypoint, perform the fol-

lowing to enter additional infor-

mation airport information.

1. Use the Joystick to place

the cursor over the TYPE field

as shown in Figure 1-81.

User Waypoints

Figure 1-81

1 Waypoint Identifier - Editable on the first User Airport Edit display.

2 Runway Orientation - Selectable from 01/19 through 18/36.

3 Runway Surface Type - Hard or Soft can be selected.

4 Comm Frequecy Type - One of 33 abbreviations may be selected in each of two fields.

See Appendix A for abbreviations.

5 Comm Frequecies - Any valid 8.33 kHz or 25 kHz communication frequency in each of two

fields.

6 Runway Elevation - The runway elevation can be entered from -2000 to 30,000 ft.

7 Runway Length - The length of the runway can be entered from 0 to 20,000 ft.

8 Airport Icon - Airport symbol that will be displayed on the map. If the runway Surface is

set to Soft, the symbol will be of the type for a soft runway with no IFR approach. If the

runway Surface is set to Hard, the symbol will be of the type for a hard runway with no IFR

approach.

9 Waypoint Type - This field reflects Waypoint or Airport depending on the desired waypoint

definition. Selectable on the first User Airport Edit display.

1-48

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

2. Turn the Rotary Knob to

select Airport as shown in

Figure 1-82. Note that the dis-

play title has changed to USER

AIRPORT EDIT 1 of 2.

3. Press the NEXT Softkey to

display USER AIRPORT 2 of 2

as shown in Figure 1-83. The

cursor will be initially be placed

in Runway orientation field

and the default will be None.

4. Turn the Rotary Knob to

enter the desired runway orien-

tation. Values of 01/19 through

18/36 may be entered as seen

in Figure 1-84. Note that when

a value entered, the airport

icon now reflects a runway with

the entered orientation.

User Waypoints

Figure 1-82

Figure 1-83

Figure 1-84

1-49

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

5. Use the Joystick to place

the cursor in the Surface field

as shown in Figure 1-85.

6. Turn the Rotary Knob to

select either Soft or Hard for

the type of surface as shown in

Figure 1-86. Note that the air-

port icon has changed to reflect

a hard surface runway.

7. Use the Joystick to place

the cursor in the runway

Length field. Use the Rotary

Knob to select the desired

runway length. A value from 0

to 20,000 feet can be entered.

Note that 2000 ft. has been

entered in Figure 1-87.

8. Use the Joystick to place

the cursor in the runway eleva-

tion (Elev) field. Use the

Rotary Knob to select the

desired runway elevation. A

value from -2000 to 30,000 feet

can be entered. See Figure 1-

87.

User Waypoints

Figure 1-86

Figure 1-87

Figure 1-85

1-50

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

9. Two communication fre-

quencies may be entered to

provide QuickTune™ capa-

bility. Use the Joystick to place

the cursor in the desired comm

Type field as shown in Figure

1-88.

10. Turn the Rotary Knob to

select the desired the fre-

quency type as shown in

Figure 1-89. See Table 1-3 for

a list of possible Type entries.

11. In a similar manner as pre-

viously discussed, use the

Joystick and the Rotary Knob

to enter the desired frequen-

cies in the appropriate Freq

fields as seen in Figure 1-90.

12. When all desired entries

are completed, press the

SAVE & EXIT Softkey.

User Waypoints

Figure 1-88

Figure 1-89

Figure 1-90

1-51

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

User Waypoints

Table 1-3 Comm Frequency Types

ATIS Automatic Terminal Information Service

PTAX Pre-Taxi Clearance

CLR Clearance Delivery

GRND Ground Control

TWR Tower

GCO Ground Communication Outlet

UNIC Unicom

MCOM Multicom

CL B Class B Airspace (VFR Frequency)

CL C Class C Airspace (VFR Frequency)

TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area

APR Approach

DEP Departure

CTR Center

ARVL Arrival

AWOS Automated Weather Observation System

ASOS Automated Surface Observation System

CTA Control Area (VFR frequency used outside U.S.)

DIR Director (approach control/radar)

TMA Terminal Area (VFR frequency used outside U.S.)

RDR Radar-Only Frequency

RDO Radio

AAS Aeronautical Advisory Service

AFIS Aerodrome Flight Information Service

ATF Aerodrome Traffic Frequency

CTAF Common Traffic Advisory Frequency

MF Mandatory Frequency

ILS Instrument Landing System

LOC Localizer Approach

LBC Localizer Back Course

LDA Localizer Type Directional Aid Approach

SDF Simplified Directional Facility Approach

IGS Instrument Guidance System (used outside U.S. only)

1-52

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

EDITING A USER WAY-

POINT

Editing a waypoint is accom-

plished in a similar manner to

entering a new waypoint. To

edit a User Waypoint that has

been previously stored, per-

form the following steps:

1. Press the MENU Key to

display Figure 1-91. Press the

AUX MENU Softkey to display

Figure 1-92. Use the Joystick

or Rotary Knob to place the

cursor over User Waypoints

as seen in Figure 1-92.

2. Press the SELECT

Softkey to display the USER

WAYPOINT LIST display as

shown in Figure 1-93. Use the

Rotary Knob and Joystick to

select waypoint to edit.

3. Press the EDIT WPT

Softkey to display the USER

WAYPOINT EDIT.

4. Repeat steps 3 through 20

in Entering A User Waypoint.

User Waypoints

Figure 1-93

Figure 1-91

Figure 1-92

1-53

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

DELETING A USER

WAYPOINT

To delete a User Waypoint that

has been previously stored,

perform the following steps:

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 in

Editing A User Waypoint.

2. Press the DELETE WPT

Softkey. Figure 1-94 will now

be displayed.

3. Press the OK Softkey to complete the deletion.

NOTE: Waypoints that are part of a flight plan (denoted by the lock

symbol in the User Waypoint List) cannot be deleted until removed from

the flight plan.

User Waypoints

Figure 1-94

1-54

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

User Waypoints

Intentionally left blank

1-55

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

DIRECT-TO OPERATION

The Direct-To Key initiates operation directly to a destination from the air-

craft’s present position. This destination can be a User Waypoint or any

point defined in the database. It can also be used within an active flight

as discussed later in this section.

The KMD 250 must be navigating using the internal GPS when using the

Direct-To feature. If an external GPS is selected as the current naviga-

tion source, Direct-To will not be accessible on the KMD 250. In this

case the Direct-To operation

must be performed from the

external navigation source.

DIRECT-TO A DATA-

BASE OR STORED

WAYPOINT

1. If there is no active flight

plan, pressing the Direct-To

Key will display Figure 1-95.

2. Turn the Rotary Knob to

display the Waypoint Entry

Page as shown previously in

Figure 1-76. The desired desti-

nation can be entered here by

using the Rotary Knob as dis-

cussed previously.

3. Press the OK Softkey to

enter the destination in the

DIRECT TO field as in Figure

1-96.

Also, the NEAREST Softkey

can be used to select a desti-

nation from the FIND

NEAREST list as discussed

earlier in this section. Pressing

the SELECT Softkey will enter

the selected identifier into the

DIRECT TO field.

4. Press the ACTIVATE

Softkey and the selected

Direct-To route will be dis-

played on the Map as shown in

Figure 1-97.

Direct-To Operation

Figure 1-95

Figure 1-96

Figure 1-97

1-56

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

DIRECT-TO USING THE

JOYSTICK POINTER

1. While on the Map Display,

use the Joystick Pointer to

select the desired destination

as in Figure 1-98. The pointer

can be placed anywhere on the

map, not just used to select

database items.

2. Press the Direct-To Key

and the identifier for the

selected destination will be

entered into the DIRECT TO

field as shown in Figure 1-99.

If the Joystick Pointer is placed

on something other than a

database item, the next avail-

able default User Waypoint

name will appear in the

DIRECT TO field. This way-

point will be placed on the map

at the position of the Joystick

Pointer. To change the way-

point name, see the discussion

on User Waypoints earlier in

this section.

3. Press the ACTIVATE

Softkey and the route will be

displayed on the Map as

shown in Figure 1-100.

OBS COURSE MODE

The Direct-To function also allows an OBS course to be navigated to the

selected destination. OBS Course Mode can be used independently to a

waypoint, or in conjunction with an active flight plan. See Using OBS

Course Mode Within A Flight Plan later in this section.

OBS Course Mode allows the selection of a course based on a bearing

“to” or “from” a waypoint much like a VOR receiver.

Direct-To Operation

Figure 1-98

Figure 1-99

Figure 1-100

1-57

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

1. Select the destination as

discussed in the Direct-To pro-

cedure.

2. Press the OBS COURSE

Softkey shown in Figure 1-101.

This will display the OBS

COURSE window as shown in

Figure 1-102.

NOTE: Unless using OBS

Course Mode within an active

flight plan, Auto Leg

Sequencing (see Appendix A)

will be disabled.

3. The course field will be

highlighted. Use the Rotary

Knob to select the desired

OBS course. If desired, the

Joystick can be used to select

the destination identifier in

order to enter a new destina-

tion. Turn the Rotary Knob to

display the WAYPOINT

ENTRY window.

4. Press the ACTIVATE

Softkey and the route will be

displayed on the Map as

shown in Figure 1-103.

NOTE: When OBS Mode is

active, pressing the Direct-To

Key will display the active OBS

COURSE window.

To change the OBS course to

a Direct-To route press the the

Direct-To Key to display Figure 1-102. Press the DIR TO Softkey and a

Direct-To will be selected for the current identifier. Press the ACTIVATE

Softkey to enter and display the Direct-To route.

To center the CDI, from the OBS COURSE window (Figure 1-102) press

the DIR TO Softkey then press the OBS COURSE Softkey. The CDI will

now be centered.

Direct-To Operation

Figure 1-101

Figure 1-102

Figure 1-103

1-58

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Direct-To Operation

Intentionally left blank

1-59

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

FLIGHT PLAN OPERATION

VFR flight plans can be created in the KMD 250 when configured to use

the internal GPS. In units without the optional internal GPS the active

flight plan from the external GPS may be viewed.

The FPL Key is used to toggle between the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

Page and the FLIGHT PLAN INDEX Page.

NOTE: The internal GPS of the KMD 250 is not certified for IFR opera-

tion.

The KMD 250 calculates a flight plan by picking the most direct route

between selected waypoints. This is known as Leg Mode operation.

VIEWING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

Press the FPL Key to display

the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

Page as shown in Figure 1-

104. If the KMD 250 does not

have the optional internal GPS

the DONE and DELETE WPT

Softkeys will not be available.

The active leg and waypoint

are shown in magenta. When

Auto Leg Sequencing is

enabled, after passage of the

active waypoint the KMD 250

will automatically sequence to

the next waypoint in the flight

plan. The next leg and active waypoint will then be displayed in

magenta.

The waypoints in the flight plan are listed on the left of display. Moving

the Joystick up or down will scroll through the waypoints. The magenta

arrow denotes the current leg of the flight plan. The active waypoint

identifier is also displayed in magenta. When scrolling through the way-

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-104

☞

Active Flight

Plan

Flight Plan

Index

1-60

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

points, as each waypoint is

highlighted it is displayed on

the map centered in the

window. The current leg and

active waypoint are shown in

magenta on the map.

Information about a waypoint

can be viewed by using the

Joystick to select the desired

waypoint identifier in the list

and then pressing the MORE

INFO Softkey. Information will

be displayed as shown in

Figure 1-105. Press the

CLEAR Softkey to exit.

Pressing the USE STICK

Softkey will allow use of the

Joystick Pointer for map inter-

rogation as discussed previ-

ously in Map Operation (see

Figure 1-106. Press the

RESET STICK Softkey to exit

Joystick Pointer operation.

If applicable, press the MORE

INFO softkey to view more

information about the selection. In the case of an airport, pressing the

NEXT softkey on the AIRPORT INFO 1 of 2 Page will display the

AIRPORT INFO 2 of 2 and allow access to the QUICK TUNE Softkey.

Pressing this softkey will tune the radios to the correct frequencies for

the airport as discussed previously in Airport Information.

VIEWING FLIGHT PLAN

DATA

When viewing the the ACTIVE

FLIGHT PLAN Page (Figure

1-105) or the STORED

FLIGHT PLAN Page, pressing

the DATA VIEW Softkey will

display more detailed data

pertaining to the flight plan

selected as shown in Figure 1-

107. Pressing the MAP VIEW Softkey will return to the previous map

view display.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-107

Figure 1-106

Figure 1-105

1-61

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

FUEL FLOW

If the KMD 250 is installed in

conjunction with a fuel flow

monitor, the actual fuel flow

and estimated fuel usage cal-

culations will be displayed in

white as in Figure 1-107. This

will allow the KMD 250 to cal-

culate the fuel flow for each leg

of the flight plan based on cur-

rent ground speed. If no fuel

flow monitor is used, the value

may be entered manually by

using the Joystick to select the

FFLOW field. Use the Rotary

Knob to enter the desired

value. User entered values,

and calculations based on user

entered data are displayed in

yellow as seen in Figure 1-108.

NOTE: Fuel flow values can

only be entered manually on

the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

Page if no fuel flow monitor is

installed.

CHANGING THE DATA

COLUMNS

The three data columns can be

changed to reflect various types

of information for each leg. To

change the columns perform the

following steps.

1. Press the CHANGE

FIELDS Softkey to display

Figure 1-109.

2. Move the Joystick horizon-

tally to select the desired data column (in this case the first column).

3. Turn the Rotary Knob to select one of the available options from the

list. Each field can be customized to display any of the following:

4. Press the DONE Softkey when finished and the columns will now

display the selected data options.

Pressing the RESTORE DEFAULT Softkey to change the columns back

to the factory settings.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-108

Figure 1-109

DIS Distance En Route

DTK Desired Track

ESA En Route Safe Altitude

ETA Estimated Time of Arrival

ETE Estimated Time En Route

FUEL Estimated Fuel En Route

Leg Dis Leg Distance

Leg Fuel Estimated Leg Fuel

Leg MSA Leg Minimum Safe Altitude

Leg Time Estimated Leg Time

Sunrise Sunrise Time

Sunset Sunset Time

1-62

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

CREATING A FLIGHT

PLAN

A maximum of 99 flight plans

may be stored in the KMD 250.

Each flight plan may contain up

to 99 waypoints. To create a

new flight plan, perform the fol-

lowing steps.

1. Press the FPL Key to

toggle to the FLIGHT PLAN

INDEX Page. Initially, if no

flight plans have been stored,

the display will appear as

shown in Figure 1-110.

2. Press the NEW FPL

Softkey to display the STORED

FLIGHT PLAN Page as seen

in Figure 1-111. The first way-

point in the flight plan can be

entered using the Joystick

Pointer and selecting a point

on the map or by entering an

identifier.

To enter an identifier, turn the

Rotary Knob and the WAYPO-

INT ENTRY window will be dis-

played as in Figure 1-112. Use

the Rotary Knob to enter the

desired starting waypoint in the

same manner as discussed in

previous procedures.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-112

Figure 1-110

Figure 1-111

1-63

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Press the OK Softkey and the

first waypoint is entered in the

list as shown in Figure 1-113.

To select the waypoint using

the Joystick Pointer, press the

USE STICK Softkey. Using

the Joystick, move the pointer

to the desired place on the map

as in Figure 1-114. Press the

INSERT WPT Softkey to enter

the waypoint in the list.

3. Continue entering way-

points using either method until

the flight plan is complete.

Press the DONE Softkey and

the flight plan will be entered

on the FLIGHT PLAN INDEX

Page as shown in Figure 1-

115.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-113

Figure 1-114

Figure 1-115

1-64

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

4. To start using the flight

plan press the USE Softkey.

Figure 1-116 will be displayed.

5. Press the OK Softkey to

activate the flight plan as

shown in Figure 1-117.

ACTIVATING A STORED

FLIGHT PLAN

Perform the following steps to

activate a flight plan that has

been stored in the KMD 250.

1. Press the FPL Key to dis-

play the FLIGHT PLAN INDEX

Page as seen in Figure 1-118.

Note that the current active

flight plan is displayed in

magenta with an arrow at the

top of the list stored flight

plans.

2. Use the Joystick to select

the desired flight plan in the list.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-118

Figure 1-116

Figure 1-117

1-65

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

3. Press the USE Softkey and

Figure 1-119 will be displayed.

4. Press the OK Softkey to

use the selected flight plan. If

desired, the selected flight plan

can be navigated in reverse by

pressing the INVERT Softkey.

The selected flight plan will now

be displayed on the ACTIVE

FLIGHT PLAN Page as in

Figure 1-120.

5. Press the DONE Softkey to

return to the FLIGHT PLAN

INDEX Page.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-119

Figure 1-120

1-66

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

EDITING A STORED

FLIGHT PLAN

To edit the active or a stored

flight plan, begin by pressing

the FPL Key to display the

FLIGHT PLAN INDEX Page as

seen in Figure 1-121. Press

the EDIT/REVIEW Softkey to

display Figure 1-122. Now var-

ious editing parameters may be

accomplished as in the fol-

lowing discussions.

Pressing the COPY Softkey will

allow the selected flight plan to

be copied for editing while not

changing the original.

DELETING A WAYPOINT IN

THE FLIGHT PLAN

To delete a waypoint in the

flight plan, perform the fol-

lowing steps.

1. Use the Joystick to select

the waypoint to be deleted in

list on the left of the display.

2. Press the DELETE WPT

Softkey to display Figure 1-

123. Press the OK Softkey to

delete the waypoint.

3. Press the DONE Softkey

to return to the FLIGHT PLAN

INDEX Page.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-121

Figure 1-122

Figure 1-123

1-67

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

INSERTING A WAYPOINT IN

THE FLIGHT PLAN

To insert a waypoint in the flight

plan, perform the following

steps.

1. Use the Joystick to select

a waypoint in list to which the

new waypoint will be inserted

before or after (in this case

OTM) as shown in Figure 1-

124.

2. Select the new waypoint

with one of the following

methods.

To enter an identifier, turn the

Rotary Knob and the WAYPO-

INT ENTRY window will be dis-

played as in Figure 1-125. Use

the Rotary Knob to enter the

desired waypoint (KTVK) in the

same manner as discussed in

previous procedures. Press

the OK Softkey and the way-

point is entered before OTM as

shown in Figure 1-126.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-124

Figure 1-125

Figure 1-126

1-68

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

To select the waypoint using

the Joystick Pointer, press the

USE STICK Softkey. Using

the Joystick, move the pointer

to the desired place (KTVK) on

the map as in Figure 1-127.

Press the INSERT BEFORE or

INSERT AFTER Softkey to

enter the waypoint before or

after the waypoint selected in

the list as seen in Figure 1-128.

3. Press the RESET STICK

Softkey and the new waypoint

will be displayed in the flight

plan as in Figure 1-129.

4. Press the DONE Softkey

to return to the FLIGHT PLAN

INDEX Page.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-127

Figure 1-128

Figure 1-129

1-69

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

CHANGING THE NAME OF

THE FLIGHT PLAN

The name of the flight plan can

be changed from either the

STORED FLIGHT PLAN or

ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Pages

while in FPL Map View or FPL

Data View.

To change the name of the

flight plan, perform the fol-

lowing steps.

1. Use the Joystick to select

the flight plan name as shown

in Figure 1-130.

2. Turn the Rotary Knob one

increment and the flight plan

name will shift to the left with

the first character highlighted

as in Figure 1-131.

3. Use the Rotary Knob to

enter the desired first character

for the new waypoint name.

4. Use the Joystick to select

the next character field.

5. Use the Rotary Knob to

enter the next desired char-

acter for the new waypoint

name. Continue until the

desired name is entered as

seen in Figure 1-132.

Pressing the DEFAULT NAME

Softkey will cause the flight plan name to revert back to name previously

given by KMD 250. Pressing the CLEAR NAME Softkey will delete all

characters in the flight plan name field allowing different characters to be

entered.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-130

Figure 1-131

Figure 1-132

1-70

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

6. Press the OK Softkey and

the new name will shift back to

the center as in Figure 1-133.

7. Press the DONE Softkey

and the new flight plan name

will be displayed in the list of

flight plans as shown in Figure

1-134.

DELETING A STORED

FLIGHT PLAN

To delete a flight plan, perform

the following steps.

1. Press the FPL Key until

the FLIGHT PLAN INDEX

Page is displayed as shown in

Figure 1-134.

2. Use the Joystick to select

the flight plan name.

3. Press the DELETE

Softkey and Figure 1-135 will

be displayed.

4. Press the OK Softkey and

the flight plan will be deleted.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-133

Figure 1-134

Figure 1-135

1-71

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

DELETING THE ACTIVE

FLIGHT PLAN

To delete the active flight plan

perform the following steps:

1. Press the FPL Key until the

FLIGHT PLAN INDEX Page is

displayed as shown in Figure

1-136. Note that the active

flight plan is highlighted in

magenta.

2. Press the DELETE Softkey

and Figure 1-137 will be dis-

played to verify the deletion of

the active flight plan.

3. Press the OK Softkey to

delete the active flight plan. As

shown in Figure 1-138, the

active flight plan is no longer

displayed. Note also that the

previously active flight plan has

not been deleted from the list of

stored flight plans.

NOTE: If the active flight plan

has not been stored prior to

deleting, press the COPY

Softkey to store a copy of the

active flight plan before

pressing the DELETE Softkey.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-136

Figure 1-137

Figure 1-138

1-72

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

USING DIRECT-TO IN THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

Sometimes it may be desirable to proceed directly to a waypoint in a

flight plan or a specific leg in a flight plan. For example, after takeoff in a

terminal area, vectors may be given followed by a clearance directly to

the first waypoint in the filed flight plan or to intercept a particular leg in

the filed flight plan. A Direct-To can be performed to the waypoint or to

the flight plan leg. After reaching the waypoint or leg the KMD 250 will

automatically begin navigating the active flight plan. If waypoints exist in

the flight plan prior to that which the Direct-To is established, these way-

points will be bypassed. If a Direct-To is established to a waypoint not in

the flight plan, the navigation of the active flight plan will not resume after

the Direct-To waypoint is reached.

NOTE: Remember, the internal GPS of the KMD 250 is not certified for

IFR operation. Navigation of ATC clearances on the KMD 250 can only

be done as a backup to the primary navigation system.

PROCEEDING DIRECT-TO

AN ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

WAYPOINT

To do a Direct-To to a way-

point within an active flight plan

perform the following steps.

1. Press the Direct-To Key to

display Figure 1-139.

2. Use the Joystick to scan

the waypoints in the active

flight plan.

3. When the desired waypoint

is displayed, press the

ACTIVATE Softkey and the

Map will again be displayed as

in Figure 1-140. Note the

Direct-To is now plotted from

aircraft’s present position to the

waypoint.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-139

Figure 1-140

1-73

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

4. The Direct-To will also be

denoted on the ACTIVE

FLIGHT PLAN Page. Press

the FPL Key and note the

change in the magenta arrow

in the waypoint list indicates a

Direct-To the waypoint as

shown in Figure 1-141.

After the waypoint is reached,

the KMD 250 will navigate the

remainder of the active flight

plan.

MANUALLY SELECTING AN

ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN LEG

To select a specific leg within

an active flight plan perform the

following steps.

1. Press the Direct-To Key to

display the Direct-To window

as shown previously in Figure

1-139 .

2. Press the Direct-To Key a

second time to display Figure

1-142.

3. Use the Joystick to scan

the flight plan legs.

4. When the desired leg is

displayed, press the ACTI-

VATE Softkey and the Map will

again be displayed as in Figure

1-143. Note the airplane is

navigating to intercept the

selected flight plan leg.

After the leg is intercepted, the KMD 250 will provide navigation guid-

ance the remainder of the active flight plan.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-142

Figure 1-143

Figure 1-141

1-74

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

DELETING A DIRECT-TO

WITHIN THE ACTIVE

FLIGHT PLAN

If it becomes necessary to

delete a Direct-To in an active

flight plan (as seen in Figure 1-

140), perform the following

steps:

1. Press the Direct-To Key to

display Figure 1-144.

2. Press the DELETE

DIRECT Softkey to display

Figure 1-145.

3. Press the OK Softkey.

The Map will again be dis-

played with guidance to inter-

cept and resume the active

flight plan as shown in Figure

1-146.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-145

Figure 1-146

Figure 1-144

1-75

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

USING OBS COURSE MODE IN THE ACTIVE FLIGHT

PLAN

It may also be desirable to proceed directly to a waypoint in a flight plan

on a specific bearing. An OBS Course can be set to the waypoint. If

Automatic Leg Sequencing (see Appendix A) is enabled, after reaching

the waypoint the KMD 250 will automatically begin navigating the next

leg in the active flight plan. If Automatic Leg Sequencing is disabled, the

aircraft will overfly the waypoint and continue on the selected course. If

waypoints exist in the flight plan prior to that which the OBS Course is

established, these waypoints will be bypassed. If an OBS Course is

established to a waypoint not in the flight plan, the navigation of the

active flight plan will not resume after the waypoint is reached.

SETTING AN OBS COURSE

TO AN ACTIVE FLIGHT

PLAN WAYPOINT

To set an OBS Course to a

waypoint within an active flight

plan perform the following

steps.

1. Press the Direct-To Key to

display Figure 1-147.

2. Use the Joystick to scan

the waypoints in the active

flight plan.

3. When the desired waypoint

is displayed, press the OBS

COURSE Softkey to display

Figure 1-148. Enter the

desired bearing “to” or “from”

the waypoint.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-147

Figure 1-148

1-76

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

4. Use the Joystick to high-

light the Auto Leg Seq. field

as shown in Figure 1-149.

5. Use the Rotary Knob to

select Enabled. With Auto

Leg Sequencing enabled the

remaining portion of the flight

plan will automatically resume

after passing the waypoint.

6. Press the ACTIVATE

Softkey to start navigating the

OBS Course. The selected

course will be displayed as the

active portion of the flight plan

as seen in Figure 1-150.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-149

Figure 1-150

1-77

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

DELETING AN OBS

COURSE WITHIN THE

ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

If it becomes necessary to

cancel the selected OBS

Course in an active flight plan

(as seen in Figure 1-150), per-

form the following steps:

1. Press the Direct-To Key to

display Figure 1-151.

2. Press the DELETE

DIRECT Softkey and Figure 1-

152 will be displayed.

3. Press the OK Softkey to

confirm the deletion. The map

will now display the active flight

plan in Leg Mode as shown on

Figure 1-153.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-151

Figure 1-152

Figure 1-153

1-78

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

TRIP PLANNING USING

PRESENT POSITION

For planning purposes the

internal calculator can be used

to determine such things as

time, distance and required fuel

to waypoints, for another flight

plan or for modifications to the

active flight plan. This is done

by inserting the aircraft’s prese-

nt position into a desired sce-

nario and using the data view

of the Active Flight Plan Page

and selecting the desired data

columns to present the needed

information.

The following example illus-

trates checking time, distance

and required fuel to KDSM

while navigating a flight plan

from KIXD to KOSH as shown

on Figure 1-154.

1. Perform the following

steps to create a new flight

plan as previously discussed.

2. Enter the desired destina-

tion (in this case KDSM) using

the Rotary Knob as shown in

Figure 1-155.

3. Press the OK Softkey to

display Figure 1-156.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-154

Figure 1-155

Figure 1-156

1-79

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

4. Use the Joystick to high-

light the destination identifier as

shown in Figure 1-157.

5. Turn the Rotary Knob one

increment to display Figure 1-

158.

6. Press the INSERT PPOS

Softkey and the aircraft’s

present position will be inserted

before the selected identifier as

seen in Figure 1-159. ETA,

distance and required fuel to

KDSM are now displayed in the

data columns based on current

ground speed and fuel flow

(FFLOW) value indicated.

Inserting the aircraft’s present

position in the flight plan is just

like inserting any other way-

point in the flight plan except

the position continually

updates.

Note the ground speed and fuel

flow values shown in Figure 1-

159 indicate actual values by

being displayed in white. Fuel

flow is taken from a fuel flow

monitor and GPS ground

speed is being used.

7. If desired, press the

CHANGE FIELDS Softkey to

change the data columns as

discussed previously to view

other calculated data for the destination.

8. If desired, both the ground speed (GNDSPD) and fuel flow (FFLOW)

can be changed to a user defined number to view various “what if” sce-

narios.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-157

Figure 1-158

Figure 1-159

1-80

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

9. To change the ground

speed as in Figure 1-60, Use

the Joystick to place the cursor

in the desired field. Use the

Rotary Knob to enter the

desired values. Note the

changes to the ETA and FUEL.

Yellow indicates user entered

data and data calculated from

user entered data.

10. With the cursor over the

GNDSPD value, press the USE

ACTUAL Softkey to return the

ground speed to the actual

GPS ground speed as shown

in Figure 1-161. Note also that

the ETA and FUEL values

have also returned to actual

values.

Fuel flow (FFLOW) values can

be changed in the same

manner as ground speed. Fuel

flow and ground speed can

also be changed in conjunction with one another to work out different

scenarios.

NOTE: If the KMD 250 is not interfaced with a functioning fuel flow mon-

itor, the fuel values will always be displayed in yellow.

11. Press the DONE Softkey to return to the FLIGHT PLAN INDEX

Page. The flight plan created in this process can now be deleted if no

longer needed.

Flight Plan Operation

Figure 1-160

Figure 1-161

1-81

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

SYSTEM SETUP

This portion of the manual is

designed to provide step by

step instructions for the setup

of the KMD 250. Note that not

all features discussed here are

available in all installations. If

an item is not available it will

appear “grayed out” and will not

be selectable.

MAP SETUP

1. Press the MENU Key to

display Figure 1-162. Press

the MAP SETUP Softkey to

display Figure 1-163. Use the

Joystick to select the desired

field and turn the Rotary Knob

to make the desired changes.

Pressing the OVLY SETUP

Softkey will go directly to

OVERLAYS GROUP Page for

selection of map overlays as

discussed later in Map Setup.

Orientation: Set either in Track Up, North Up or Heading Up.

Extended TRK: Turns on or off the extended track line, which is drawn

ahead of the present position in the direction of the present track.

Range Rings: Turns range rings on or off on the map.

Airport Settings: Selectable airport filtering for display on the map.

Min Rwy Len: Minimum Runway Length allows the display of airports

on the map based on minimum runway length. This can be set to Any or

1000 ft to 5000 ft in 100 foot increments.

Surface: Allows the display of airports on the map based on Any sur-

face or Hard surface only.

Label: May be set to display the airport on the map with ICAO identifier,

the airport Name or City.

All settings on MAP SETTINGS GROUP 1 affect all map displays for all

functions. Settings on GROUP 2 through 6affects only the displays for

the currently viewed function.

System Setup

Figure 1-162

Figure 1-163

1-82

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

2. Press the NEXT GROUP

Softkey to display the AVIATI-

ON ICON GROUP Page as in

Figure 1-164.

VFR Map aviation related icons

are shown with corresponding

definitions.

The next series of menus

allows customizing of the Map

Displays to show the amount of

data desired for ease of read-

ability at various display

ranges.

The maximum range settings

at which the ICON, LINE

and/or TEXT is displayed on

the map may be selected for

each category. Use the

Joystick to select the desired

field and turn the Rotary Knob

to change the setting.

3. Press the NEXT GROUP

Softkey to display the AVIATI-

ON LINE GROUP Page as in

Figure 1-165.

VFR Map aviation related lines

are shown with corresponding

definitions.

The database filters airspace

first by class, then by type. If

the class is not known and the

type does not fit into one of the

categories, it will be displayed

as Unknown.

Other SUA types are Radar

Area, Alert, Caution, Training, Warning or Unspecified.

Again, use the Joystick to select the desired field and turn the Rotary

Knob to change the setting.

NOTE: Class A, E, F and G airspace will not be shown in the United

States, but are in the international data.

4. Press the NEXT GROUP Softkey to display the LAND ICON

GROUP Page as in Figure 1-166.

System Setup

Figure 1-164

Figure 1-165

Figure 1-166

1-83

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

VFR Map land related icons

are shown with corresponding

definitions.

As before, use the Joystick to

select the desired field and turn

the Rotary Knob to change the

setting.

5. Press the NEXT GROUP

Softkey to display the second

LAND LINE GROUP Page as

in Figure 1-167.

Again, use the Joystick to

select the desired field and turn

the Rotary Knob to change the

setting.

6. Press the NEXT GROUP

or OVLY SETUP Softkey to

display the OVERLAYS

GROUP Page as in Figure 1-

168.

Overlay icons are shown with

corresponding definitions.

NOTE: Some functions may not

be available in certain installations. Unavailable functions will appear

gray with dashes for values and will not be selectable.

If Stormscope, a Traffic Avoidance System and/or Flight Information

Services have been installed, control of how the data is displayed (or not

displayed) on the map is accomplished on this page. The maximum

range settings at which the ICON and TEXT is displayed on the map

may be selected for each function. Use the Joystick to select the desired

field and turn the Rotary Knob to change the setting.

7. Press the DONE Softkey when Map Setup is complete.

System Setup

Figure 1-168

Figure 1-167

1-84

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

NAVIGATION SETUP

1. Press the MENU Key to

display Figure 1-169.

2. Press the AUX MENU

Softkey to display Figure 1-

170.

3. Use the Joystick to select

Navigation Setup then press

the SELECT Softkey to display

the first the NAV DATA SET-

TINGS Page as in Figure 1-

171.

4. Use the Joystick to select

the desired item and use the

Rotary Knob to change the

value.

Current NAV Source :

Used to select the naviga-

tion source in units with the

optional internal GPS. Can be

set to Internal GPS or

External. Options are depen-

dent on installation configura-

tion.

AutoNav : If the KMD 250

is installed to

function with an external GPS

source, such as a KLN 94, and

KMD 250 has the optional

internal GPS, the system is

capable of automatically

switching from the external

GPS source to the internal

GPS when situations dictate.

When AutoNav is enabled, this

allows the system to prompt the user for a change in navigation source if

valid position data is not being received from the external source. The

flight plan will be copied from the external navigation source to the KMD

250 active flight plan. Navigation displayed will be limited to VFR only as

annunciated by INTERNAL VFR GPS. Options are dependent on instal-

lation configuration.

CDI Scale: Used to set the sensitivity of the Course Deviation Indicator

when being viewed in a Data Field. Options are 5nm, 1nm or .3nm.

System Setup

Figure 1-169

Figure 1-170

Figure 1-171

1-85

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

NOTE: The 0.3 nm scale could result in overly active roll performance

depending upon the particular autopilot installation. Use of the 1 nm or 5

nm CDI scale may be preferred during autopilot operation.

Time Zone: Selection determines the time displayed in any time related

Data Field. The next line gives a description of the abbreviation and the

offset from UTC time. When Local Time is selected the UTC offset field

will be an entry field to input the local offset value. The following is a list

of the available Time Zone options:

UTC Coordinated Universal Time/Zulu

GST Greenland Standard Time UTC-3

GDT Greenland Daylight Time UTC-2

ATS Atlantic Standard Time UTC-4

ATD Atlantic Daylight Time UTC-3

EST Eastern Standard Time UTC-5

EDT Eastern Daylight Time UTC-4

CST Central Standard Time UTC-6

CDT Central Daylight Time UTC-5

MST Mountain Standard Time UTC-7

MDT Mountain Daylight Time UTC-6

PST Pacific Standard Time UTC-8

PDT Pacific Daylight Time UTC-7

AKS Alaska Standard Time UTC-9

AKD Alaska Daylight Time UTC-8

HAS Hawaii Standard Time UTC-10

HAD Hawaii Daylight Time UTC-9

SST Samoa Standard Time UTC-11

SDT Samoa Daylight Time UTC-10

LCL Local Time User entered in 1/2 hour increments

Magnetic Variation: The magnetic variation used for navigation calcula-

tions. Options are Auto, Manual or External depending on installation

configuration. When Manual is selected, the offset can be entered using

the Rotary Knob.

5. Press the NEXT Softkey to

display the second NAV DATA

SETTINGS Page as in Figure

1-172.

Position Format: Determines

whether position information is

displayed with reference to

Lat/Lon (Latitude/Longitude),

UTM (Universal Transverse

Mercator) or OSGB (Ordinance

Survey of Great Britain) in the

PPOS Data Field. This will also

affect the PBRG and PDIS data when the Joystick Pointer is active.

Note: OSGB is only defined for Great Britain.

System Setup

Figure 1-172

1-86

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Near Pos Format: Determines parameters used to display the near

position reporting when viewed in a Data Field. Can be set to

Airports+VORs, VORs only or All data.

Turn Anticipation: When turned on, turn guidance to a new course is

provided along an arc.

SUA Alerting: When turned on, a Special Use Airspace Alert Message

will be annunciated when the aircraft is approximately 10 minutes or two

miles from entering the airspace.

SUA Alerting Buffer: Defines the altitude boundary for the Special Use

Airspace at which the Alert Message is annunciated. Can be set from

300 feet to 59900 feet in 100 foot increments.

Default/WPT Char.: Defines the default first character displayed in way-

point data entry fields. Use the Rotary Knob to enter the desired

alphanumeric character.

6. Press the AUX MENU Softkey to return to the first NAV DATA SET-

TINGS Page. Now press the DONE Softkey to exit the setup.

DEMO MODE & SETUP

A great way to become familiar with all the features of the KMD 250 is to

use it’s built in Demo Mode. When the KMD 250 is in the Demo Mode, it

performs as if it is receiving adequate sensor signals to use the various

functions. Units without the optional internal GPS, a pre-programmed

flight plan determined by the database type being used can be navi-

gated. Units containing the optional internal GPS can navigate any user

programmed waypoints or flight plans.

In order for the KMD 250 to function in the Demo Mode it must be used

in conjunction with a product such as the Commander 2900 from Lone

Star Aviation.

For more information on the Commander 2900-KMD 250, or to place an

order, contact:

Lone Star Aviation, Inc.

604 Wisteria Street

Mansfield, TX 76063

Phone: (682) 518-8882

FAX: (682) 518-8831

www.lonestaraviation.com

The KMD 250 is automatically put into Demo Mode when it is used with

a Commander 2900. In addition, an authorized Honeywell Service

Center may also arrange for you to put the KMD 250 into Demo Mode by

grounding the appropriate pin at the back of the unit while it is removed

from the aircraft and is connected to an appropriate power supply. The

KMD 250 must never be put into the Demo Mode when it is installed in

the aircraft.

System Setup

1-87

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

After power-up is complete

Figure 1-173 will be displayed.

Press the DEMO MODE

Softkey and Figure 1-174 will

be displayed. Press the OK

Softkey to acknowledge the

caution.

Press the OK Softkey to

acknowledge the next caution

displays as in previous discus-

sions.

DEMO MODE FOR NON-GPS

VERSIONS

If KMD 250 does not have the

optional internal GPS it will

begin navigating a simulated

flight plan that is stored on

each of the three different

types of data cards as shown

in Table 1-4.

In this example the AMR data-

base is installed, therefore,

Figure 1-175 shows the pre-programmed flight plan for KIXD to KOSH.

The system defaults for Demo

Mode will automatically start

the demo at the beginning way-

point for the flight plan stored in

the data card. The simulated

flight will be at an altitude of

2000 feet and groundspeed will

be 135 knots. Track and

heading will be equal.

System Setup

Figure 1-173

Figure 1-174

Table 1-4 Demo flight plan Waypoints

Database Type Starting Waypoint Destination Waypoint

AMR (Americas) KIXD KOSH

PAI (Pacific International) YSSY YBBN

ATI (Atlantic International) EGHD EGNJ

Figure 1-175

1-88

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

DEMO MODE FOR GPS

VERSIONS

If the KMD 250 contains the

optional internal GPS, way-

points and flight plans may be

created, stored and navigated

in the Demo Mode. After

entering Demo Mode refer to

previous discussions for opera-

tion of the KMD 250.

CHANGING DEMO MODE

SETTINGS

To modify the Demo Mode set-

tings, perform the following

steps:

1. Press the MENU Key to dis-

play the AUX MENU Softkey

as in Figure 1-176.

2. Press the AUX MENU

Softkey to display Figure 1-

177. If necessary, use the

Joystick to highlight Demo

Mode Setup as shown.

3. Press the SELECT Softkey

to display Figure 1-178. In ver-

sions without the optional

internal GPS, the default Mode

setting is Auto. When Auto is

selected, all other parameters

will be “grayed out”. To change

the other parameters, turn the

Rotary Knob to select Manual

in the Mode field. The Joystick

may now be used to select the

desired field. Turn the Rotary Knob to enter the desired values.

In versions containing the optional internal GPS, Mode is not available

and all fields are selectable and editable.

4. When finished making changes, press the RESTART DEMO Softkey

to begin the demo using the new parameters.

System Setup

Figure 1-176

Figure 1-177

Figure 1-178

1-89

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

SOFTWARE VERSIONS

The current unit software ver-

sion may be checked by per-

forming the following steps:

1. Press the MENU Key to dis-

play the AUX MENU Softkey

as in Figure 1-176.

2. Press the AUX MENU

Softkey to display Figure 1-

179. If necessary, use the

Joystick to highlight Software

Versions as shown.

3. Press the SELECT Softkey

to display Figure 1-180.

System Setup

Figure 1-180

1-90

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

DATABASE VERSIONS

The current database version

may be checked by performing

the following steps:

1. Press the MENU Key to dis-

play the AUX MENU Softkey as

in Figure 1-176.

2. Press the AUX MENU

Softkey to display Figure 1-181.

If necessary, use the Joystick to

highlight Database Versions as

shown.

3. Press the SELECT Softkey

to display Figure 1-182.

NOTE: For a VDL installation,

if a new datacard is not

installed before the date shown

under SUBSCRIPTION DATA,,

the KMD 250 will no longer

receive FIS subscriptions even

if the FIS subscriptions are cur-

rent. A new datacard is only

required on initial XM installa-

tions, not for later database

updates.

System Setup

Figure 1-181

Figure 1-182

1-91

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

MAP DISPLAY ICONS

The following table shows the map display icons and their meanings:

Map Display Icons

1-92

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Display Icons

1-93

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Display Icons

1-94

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

Map Display Icons

1-95

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

DATACARDS

DATA AREAS

Honeywell produces three datacards based on the ICAO/ARINC geo-

graphic areas for the KMD 250 that cover the entire world. Each card for

each area contains the operating software, the appropriate Jeppesen

aeronautical data, cartographic data and topological data to a high reso-

lution. Also included is a low resolution map of the rest of the world.

The ten ICAO/ARINC areas along with their three letter identifiers are:

AFR Africa CAN Canada EEU Eastern Europe

EUR Europe LAM Latin America MES Middle East

PAC Pacific SAM South America SPA South Pacific

USA USA

These areas are combined to produce three data cards covering the

entire world that contain the following data:

AMR Americas - comprising CAN, USA, LAM, SAM

ATI Atlantic International - comprising EUR, AFR, EEU, MES

PAI Pacific International - comprising PAC, SPA, EEU, MES

Datacards

1-96

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

INSERTING A NEW

DATACARD

Each KMD 250 Database cycle

will result in the necessity to

load a new database when

using the database subscripti-

on service. This is done by

inserting a new datacard.

NOTE: Since all user way-

points and flight plans are

stored on the datacard, it will

be necessary to transfer this

data to the new datacard.

The following displays depict

those seen on a KMD 250 con-

taining the internal GPS.

To change the datacard follow

these steps:

1. Turn off the KMD 250.

2. Push in the datacard until it

clicks, then release. The data-

card should now slide straight

out.

3. With the new card facing

upward, as indicated on it’s

label, insert the new datacard

until it clicks. The new data-

card is now locked in place.

4. Turn the unit on and, if

necessary, wait for the new

software to load.

5. Figure 1-183 will be dis-

played to allow flight plans and

waypoints stored on the previous datacard to be moved to the new data-

card. Press the YES Softkey to move stored data. Other wise press the

NO Softkey.

6. After pressing the YES Softkey, Figure 1-184 will be displayed. As

directed, remove the new datacard and re-insert the old datacard.

7. When Figure 1-185 is displayed re-insert the new datacard.

Datacards

Figure 1-183

Figure 1-184

Figure 1-185

1-97

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

8. The flight plans and way-

points are now written to the

new card as shown in Figure 1-

186. Press the OK Softkey.

NOTE: In units that do not

contain the internal GPS, refer-

ences to flight plans will not be

displayed. For example the

title of the window in Figure 1-

186 will be “USER WAYPOINT

DATA STORED”.

TRANSFERRING DATA

BETWEEN DATACARDS

User stored data such as flight

plans and waypoints can be

moved between datacards.

The following displays depict

those seen on a KMD 250 con-

taining the internal GPS.

STORE CURRENT USER

DATA ON ANOTHER DATA-

CARD

To move from one datacard to

another, perform the following

steps:

1. Press the MENU Key.

2. Press the AUX MENU

Softkey to display Figure 1-

187. Use the Joystick to high-

light User FPL Save/Load as

shown.

3. Press the SELECT Softkey to display Figure 1-188.

4. If necessary, use the Joystick to highlight Store current user data

on another datacard.

5. Press the SELECT Softkey.

Datacards

Figure 1-187

Figure 1-188

Figure 1-186

1-98

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

6. When Figure 1-189 is dis-

played, insert the datacard to

which the data will be copied.

7. After the datacard is

inserted, the data will be copied

and Figure 1-190 will displayed

indicating the data was copied

successfully.

8. Re-insert the original data-

card.

NOTE: In units that do not con-

tain the internal GPS, refer-

ences to flight plans will not be

displayed. For example the

title of the window in Figure 1-

190 will be “USER WAYPOINT

DATA STORED”.

RETRIEVE USER DATA

FROM ANOTHER DATA-

CARD

To move from one datacard to

another, perform the following

steps:

1. Press the MENU Key.

2. Press the AUX MENU

Softkey to display Figure 1-

191. Use the Joystick to high-

light User FPL Save/Load as

shown.

Datacards

Figure 1-189

Figure 1-190

Figure 1-191

1-99

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

3. Press the SELECT

Softkey to display Figure 1-

192.

4. If necessary, use the

Joystick to highlight Read user

data from another datacard.

5. Press the SELECT

Softkey.

6. When Figure 1-193 is dis-

played, insert the datacard

containing the data to be

copied.

7. After the datacard is

inserted, the data will be read

and Figure 1-194 will displayed

indicating the data is ready to

be copied.

8. Re-insert the original data-

card that will receive the data.

9. Figure 1-195 will be dis-

played indicating data on the

datacard will be overwritten.

10. Press the OK Softkey to

overwrite.

Datacards

Figure 1-192

Figure 1-193

Figure 1-194

Figure 1-195

1-100

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 1

Basic Operation

11. Figure 1-196 will be dis-

played showing that the data

has been stored on the data-

card.

12. Press the OK Softkey to

continue.

NOTE: In units that do not con-

tain the internal GPS, refer-

ences to flight plans will not be

displayed. For example the title

of the window in Figure 1-195

will be “STORING USER WAY-

POINT DATA”.

DATABASE INFORMATION

Due to Honeywell’s policy of continual development and routine data-

base updates, new VDL datacards will become available every 28 days.

As a registered owner of a KMD 250, you will be offered a 1/3/6/12

monthly datacard subscription.

DATABASE CYCLE INFORMATION

Keeping the database current in the KMD 250 is the user’s responsibility.

Honeywell maintains its VDL databases to be current at all times to the

latest Jeppesen 28-day data cycle.

For VDL database subscriptions and FIS subscriptions, contact

Wingman Services at the following numbers:

1-800-247-0230 if calling within the United States or Canada

(913) 712-3145 if calling from outside the United States or Canada

(913) 712-3904 FAX

e-mail: nav.database@honeywell.com

Visit Wingman Services at www.bendixking.com

For XM subscriptions, contact XM Radio at 1-800-985-9200 or

www.xmradio.com/weather.

Figure 1-196

Datacards

2-1

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

SECTION 2

FIS VDL OR XM OPERATION

INTRODUCTION

CONCEPT OF OPERATION

The Flight Information Services (FIS) system supplies real-time weather

information and other flight advisory information to pilots to enhance situ-

ation awareness.

FIS is not intended to replace voice radio services. Voice communication

of weather and meteorological information, in accordance with FAA

operating rules, is still required.

Real-time weather is available 24 hours / day, 7 days / week. Two dif-

ferent systems are available for delivery of the weather data: a ground-

based VHF Datalink (VDL) network and Baron WxWorx weather deliv-

ered via the XM Radio satellite system. Data acquired from FAA

approved weather sources is processed and then distributed to VDL

Ground Stations and to the XM satellite network. The Ground Stations

broadcast the information over a VHF Data Link (VDL) to aircraft within

line-of-sight utilizing VDL mode 2 transmitters at a bit rate up to 31.5

kbps. The XM satellite network uses two geosynchronous satellites to

broadcast network weather to aircraft at S-band (2.3 GHz) frequencies.

This diagram illustrates how FIS VDL data is received in the aircraft.

Introduction

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-1

2-2

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

See our website at www.bendixking.com for VDL network status and

coverage. Continuous coverage of most of the continental US is possible

at altitudes as low as 5,000 ft. AGL, except for regions of precipitous ter-

rain. As with all VHF communications, the line-of-sight range increases

with altitude. However, there is no appreciable increase in coverage

above 17,500 ft MSL. The following illustration shows how altitude influ-

ences FIS VDL coverage.

The following diagram illustrates how XM Wx data is received in the air-

craft.

The XM Satellite Radio weather system provides continuous coverage

down to ground level over the entire continental United States. A good

view of the southern horizon must be available in order to receive at least

one of the two satellites.

Introduction

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-2

2-3

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

To receive FIS WX products, an aircraft must be equipped with a com-

patible VDL receiver (KDR 510) or XM receiver (KDR 610), dedicated

VHF antenna or satellite antenna, and appropriate display (KMD 250).

FIS VDL uses a one-way (ground-to-air) broadcast protocol. XM WX

uses one-way (satellite network to air) broadcast protocol. Data is con-

tinually broadcast without the need to request information, nor acknowl-

edge receipt.

Both basic (no-cost) and value added fee-based products are transmitted

by VDL. Basic VDL products are displayed using standard ICAO/WMO

textual format.

The VDL ground station network repetitively broadcasts the same

product until either newer data is available or the information has

exceeded a pre-determined expiration time. Basic products are broad-

cast at least once every 5 minutes by the VDL system. Products are

broadcast once every 5 - 12 minutes (depending on the product) by the

XM system.

NOTE: Due to inherent delays, areas of coverage and relative age and

availability of the data that can be experienced, weather data cannot

be viewed as an absolute depiction of conditions at a specific location.

Introduction

No-Cost VDL Subscription Fee-Based XM Subscription

Aviation Routine Weather Reports

(METARs)

Aviation Routine Weather Reports

(METARs)

Aviation Selected Special Weather Reports

(SPECIs)

Aviation Selected Special Weather Reports

(SPECIs)

Terminal Area Forecasts (TAFs) Terminal Area Forecasts (TAFs)

Pilot Reports (PIREPs)

AIRMETs AIRMETs

SIGMETs SIGMETs

Convective SIGMETs Convective SIGMETs

Alert Weather Watches (AWWs)

Fee-Based VDL Subscriptions

NEXRAD Base Reflectivity NEXRAD Composite Reflectivity

Graphical METARs Graphical METARs

Graphical AIRMETs Graphical AIRMETs

Graphical SIGMETs Graphical SIGMETs

Graphical Convective SIGMETs Graphical Convective SIGMETs

Graphical Alert Weather Watches

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-3

Introduction

2-4

EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW

The Datalink Weather Function of the Bendix/King KMD 250 allows for

the display and control of textual and graphical weather information

received from the Bendix/King KDR 510 VDL Receiver or the KDR 610

XM satellite receiver. The choice of VDL or XM receiver is made during

installation. A single display can display only VDL weather or only XM

weather, not both.

This section describes the operation of the KMD 250 display and dis-

cusses the proper use of the displayed data for strategic weather plan-

ning.

The Bendix/King KMD 250 is shown below with the Text METAR Page

selected.

CAUTION

Datalink weather information is to be used as a strategic planning

tool for pilot decisions on avoiding inclement weather areas that

are beyond visual range or where poor visibility precludes visual

acquisition of inclement weather. Datalink weather information

may be used as follows:

a. To aid the pilot in situational awareness of hazardous meteo-

rological conditions.

b. As a cue to the pilot to communicate with the ATC controller,

AFSS specialist, Operator Dispatch, or Airline Operations Control

Center (AOCC) to get further information about the current meteo-

rological conditions. In no case should the pilot take any evasive

action based solely upon the datalink weather display.

The datalink weather information is intended for assistance in

strategic flight planning purposes only and lacks sufficient resolu-

tion and updating necessary for tactical maneuvering.

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-4

2-5

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

DATALINK WEATHER FUNCTION STATUS ICONS

The Datalink Weather Function Status Icons are located in the lower left

of the display. They are used to indicate whether or not the KMD 250 is

currently receiving and/or displaying weather information. The following

table shows the various icons and their meanings:

VDL Icon XM Icon Colors Description

Black on a cyan

background.

No weather data is currently being

received but previously received data is

being displayed on the present page.

Black on a cyan

background.

Weather data is currently being received

from a signal and displayed on the pre-

sent page. XM signal is weak.

Black on a cyan

background.

Weather data is currently being received

from a signal and displayed on the pre-

sent page. XM signal is marginal.

Black on a cyan

background.

Weather data is currently being received

from a signal and displayed on the pre-

sent page. XM signal is good.

Black on gray. Weather data not being received nor dis-

played on the present page.

Black on gray. Weather data is currently being received

from a signal but not displayed on the

present page.

Black on gray with

red slash

Fault with connection or data link radio.

Introduction

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-5

2-6 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

Intentionally left blank

Introduction

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-6

2-7 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

BASIC SERVICE WEATHER PRODUCTS

The following is a discussion of weather products offered with the basic

no-fee VDL service. Accessing and navigating these services will be

discussed in detail later in this addendum.

All basic and value-added products (except those identified as VDL only)

can also be obtained through a single fee-based XM subscription ser-

vice.

METAR

A METAR (Aviation Routine Weather Report) describes the specific

weather conditions at a particular airport at a given time. The elements

of a METAR are in order as follows:

1. Type of report

2. ICAO station identifier

3. Date and time of issue

4. Modifier (AUTO if automated report or COR if corrected observation)

5. Wind

6. Visibility

7. Runway visual range (as required)

8. Weather phenomena

9. Sky condition

10. Temperature/dew point group

11. Altimeter

12. Remarks (as required)

METARs available within the selected range of the selected area will be

displayed up to a maximum of 25 reports. These reports are displayed

in an encoded textual format. METARs displayed graphically on the

map are offered through a subscription service.

NOTE: When a specific element of METAR data is not available, it is

omitted from the report. The user must know the sequence of data to

recognize omissions. METAR observations older than 120 minutes will

be discarded.

See the section on Understanding Textual Aviation Weather Reports, for

instructions on decoding textual METARs.

Basic Service Weather Products

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-7

2-8 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Basic Service Weather Products

Rev 4 Aug/2007

SPECI

A SPECI (Aviation Selected Special Weather Report) is related to the

METAR. SPECIs are issued when certain specific conditions or events

have been observed at a particular location, usually an airport. A SPECI

will contain the same elements as a METAR and will generally be issued

for the following reasons:

1. Sudden, extreme changes in wind speed and/or direction.

2. Changes in surface visibility, especially those that change the flying

category at the reporting site.

3. Changes in runway visibility above or below 2,400 feet.

4. Appearance or termination of significant weather or natural atmos-

pheric events such as tornados, waterspouts, funnel clouds, thun-

derstorms, squalls and volcanic eruptions.

5. Changes in precipitation intensity or form.

6. Changes to ceilings when previously reported ceilings were at or

below 3,000 feet, or the formation of a ceiling below 3,000 feet.

Also, new formation of cloud layers or other obscuring phenomenon

that occur below 1,000 feet.

7. Aircraft mishaps.

8. Other meteorological conditions that the agency or the observer

determine as critical.

Refer to the section on METARs for an explanation of the elements.

The element sequence and content will be the same as those in a

METAR report with the exception of the first element denoting report

type. “SPECI” will be seen in place of “METAR”.

NOTE: When a specific element of SPECI data is not available, it is

omitted from the report. The user must know the sequence of data to

recognize omissions. SPECI observations older than 120 minutes will

be discarded.

Basic service SPECIs are offered in the encoded textual format.

See the section on Understanding Textual Aviation Weather Reports, for

instructions on decoding textual METAR/SPECIs.

TAF

A TAF (Terminal Area Forecast) is a statement of expected meteorolog-

ical conditions at an airport during a specified period of time. Many

aspects of the TAF are the same as a METAR. Abbreviations are the

same as in a METAR with addition of a few more discussed later. Many

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-8

2-9 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

of the data elements are formatted as those in a METAR report. A TAF

will contain elements in the following order:

1. Type of report

2. ICAO station identifier

3. Date and time of issue

4. Date and time valid

5. Wind

6. Visibility

7. Weather phenomena

8. Sky conditions

9. Wind shear (as required)

10. Forecast weather change indicator

TAFs available within the selected range of the selected area will be dis-

played up to a maximum of 25 reports. These reports are displayed in

an encoded textual format.

NOTE: TAFs older than the forecast validity period are discarded.

Amended or corrected TAFs generated within the issuance period are

provided as soon as they are available, and the previous outdated TAF is

no longer transmitted.

See the section on Understanding Textual Aviation Weather Reports, for

instructions on decoding textual TAFs.

PIREP (VDL ONLY)

A PIREP (Pilot Weather Report) is an observation of conditions at a spe-

cific location or along a specific route. These conditions are reported by

pilots when communications are established with ground facilities such

EFAS, AFSS/FSS, ARTCC or ATC. Abbreviations are the same as in a

METAR. Pilots are encouraged to promptly volunteer these reports. A

PIREP will contain elements in the following order:

1. Type of message (urgent or routine)

2. Location in relation to an airport or VHF NAVAID

3. Time observed

4. Flight Level (may not always be present)

5. Type of aircraft (may not always be present)

6. Sky cover (may not always be present)

7. Weather conditions (may not always be present)

8. Temperature (may not always be present)

9. Wind direction and speed (may not always be present)

Basic Service Weather Products

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-9

2-10 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Basic Service Weather Products

Rev 4 Aug/2007

10. Turbulence (may not always be present)

11. Icing (may not always be present)

12. Remarks (may not always be present)

PIREPs available within the selected range of the selected area will be

displayed up to a maximum of 25 reports. These reports are displayed

in an encoded textual format.

NOTE: PIREPs older than 120 minutes are discarded.

See the section on Understanding Textual Aviation Weather Reports, for

instructions on decoding textual PIREPs.

AIRMET

An AIRMET (Airman’s Meteorological Information) is an advisory of

significant weather that could be hazardous to single engine, light aircraft

and VFR pilots. However, parameters are such that the phenomena

does not require issuance of a SIGMET. AIRMETs address details

regarding IFR, extensive mountain obscuration, turbulence, strong sur-

face winds, icing and freezing levels. AIRMETs are considered wide-

spread because they must either be affecting or forecast to affect an

area at least 3,000 square miles. However, during the forecast period,

the actual affected area may be much smaller. AIRMETs are issued

every six hours and the maximum forecast period is 6 hours. An

AIRMET will contain elements in the following order:

1. Forecast Area

2. Report Type

3. Date and time issued

4. Report designation and reason for issuance

5. Validity period

6. Area of coverage

7. Weather phenomenon details.

These reports are displayed in an encoded textual format.

NOTE: AIRMETs may be issued up to 15 minutes prior to the start of the

validity period. The system will display the data age as zero until the start

of the validity period. AIRMETs older than 360 minutes are discarded.

Amended or corrected AIRMETs generated within the issuance period

are provided as soon as they are available, and the previous outdated

AIRMET is no longer transmitted.

When an AIRMET is cancelled, neither the original report nor the cance-

lation message can be displayed.

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-10

2-11 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

See the section on Understanding Textual Aviation Weather Reports, for

instructions on decoding textual AIRMETs.

SIGMET

A SIGMET (Significant Meteorological Information) is an advisory of non-

convective weather that is potentially hazardous to all aircraft. SIGMETs

address details regarding severe icing not associated with thunder-

storms, severe or extreme turbulence not associated with thunderstorms,

dust or sand storms lowering visibility to less than 3 miles, volcanic ash.

SIGMETs are considered widespread because they must either be

affecting or forecast to affect an area at least 3,000 square miles.

However, during the forecast period, the actual affected area may be

much smaller. SIGMETs are issued as needed and the maximum fore-

cast period is 4 hours, except for 6 hours for conditions associated with

hurricanes. A SIGMET will contain elements in the following order:

1. Forecast Area

2. Report Type

3. Date and time issued

4. Report designation and reason for issuance

5. Validity period

6. Area of coverage

7. Location of weather phenomenon

8. Weather phenomenon details.

These reports are displayed in an encoded textual format.

NOTE: SIGMETs older than the forecast period are discarded. Amended

or corrected SIGMETs generated within the issuance period are pro-

vided as soon as they are available, and the previous outdated SIGMET

is no longer transmitted.

When an SIGMET is cancelled, neither the original report nor the cance-

lation message can be displayed.

See the section on Understanding Textual Aviation Weather Reports, for

instructions on decoding textual SIGMETs.

CONVECTIVE SIGMET

A Convective SIGMET (Convective Significant Meteorological

Information) is an advisory of convective weather that the forecaster

believes hazardous to all aircraft. Convective SIGMETs address details

regarding severe thunderstorms, embedded thunderstorms, a line of

Basic Service Weather Products

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-11

2-12 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Basic Service Weather Products

Rev 4 Aug/2007

thunderstorms, or thunderstorms producing heavy precipitation affecting

an area 40 percent or more of an area at least 3,000 square miles.

Convective SIGMETs are issued hourly with a maximum forecast period

of 2 hours. A Convective SIGMET will contain elements in the following

order:

1. Region Identifier and issue date and time

2. Report designator

3. Validity period

4. Area of coverage

5. Location details

6. Weather phenomena details

NOTE: Convective SIGMETs older than the forecast period are dis-

carded. Amended or corrected Convective SIGMETs generated within

the issuance period are provided as soon as they are available, and the

previous outdated Convective SIGMET is no longer transmitted.

See the section on Understanding Textual Aviation Weather Reports, for

instructions on decoding textual Convective SIGMETs.

ALERT WEATHER WATCHES (VDL ONLY)

Alert Weather Watches (AWW) are Alert Severe Weather Watch

Bulletins that describe areas of possible severe thunderstorm or tornado

development. These are watches, not warnings; and are issued as

needed. Severe weather may not actually develop. An Alert Weather

Watch will contain elements in the following order:

1. Report designation and date and time of issuance

2. Watch number, reason for issuance, area of coverage and validity

period.

3. Watch coordinates

4. Forecast

NOTE: Alert Weather Watches older than the forecast period are dis-

carded.

See the section on Understanding Textual Aviation Weather Reports, for

instructions on decoding textual Alert Weather Watches.

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-12

2-13 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

VALUE ADDED SERVICE WEATHER PRODUCTS

The following is a discussion of weather products offered with the value

added VDL subscription service. Accessing and navigating these ser-

vices will be discussed in detail later in this section.

All basic and value-added products (except those identified as VDL only)

can also be obtained through a single fee-based XM subscription ser-

vice.

NEXRAD

Next Generation Radar (NEXRAD) is formally designated WSR-88D,

which stands for Weather Service Radar (Doppler) and was commis-

sioned in 1988.

FIS VDL provides NEXRAD base reflectivity and XM WX provides

NEXRAD composite reflectivity. Each NEXRAD ground radar site scan

is composed of separate beam scans at several elevation angles for

360 degrees around the site. Base reflectivity is the highest precipita-

tion echo (reflectivity) contained in the lowest NEXRAD radar elevation

angle scan (5 degrees). Composite reflectivity provides the highest

precipitation echoes within all of the elevation scan angles. The

NEXRAD base or composite reflectivity modes provide a display of

echo intensity depicted by colors. NEXRAD information is good for

identifying precipitation intensity.

This NEXRAD base reflectivity data product content consists of reflec-

tivity measured at the minimum scan angle of 0.5 degree elevation.

CAUTION: NEXRAD data must be used for strategic planning pur-

poses only. Due to inherent delays and relative age of the data

that can be experienced, NEXRAD data cannot be used for tactical

avoidance of weather.

NEXRAD reflectivity images

older than 75 minutes are dis-

carded and no longer dis-

played.

Figure 2-1 shows a typical

NEXRAD display. Political

boundaries, rivers, lakes, and

oceans are depicted in con-

junction with weather.

The display range may be

changed to zoom in on a spe-

cific area to get a more detailed weather picture, or zoom out to display

a wider range.

Figure 2-1

Value Added Service Weather Products

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-13

2-14 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Value Added Service Weather Products

Rev 4 Aug/2007

NEXRAD ABNORMALITIES

The following is a list of NEXRAD abnormalities that may be experi-

enced:

1. Each NEXRAD site can operate in two modes, "Clear Air" mode or

"Precipitation" mode. When no significant precipitation exists in the scan-

ning area of the radar a NEXRAD site produces images in the "Clear Air"

mode. In this mode the radar is very sensitive to small targets, making it

possible to detect minute particles such as pollen, smoke and dust.

2. Ground clutter is detected when nearby buildings, trees, and towers

reflect radar energy back to the NEXRAD site. Because NEXRAD is a

Doppler radar, many stationary targets are filtered out. However, if a

tower or tree sways slightly in the wind, it will show up on the scan as a

target. These “moving” objects are the targets referred to as ground

clutter. Radar returns from very near the site (within a radius 20-30 nau-

tical miles) indicating very high reflectivities often include ground clutter.

3. Strobes are spurious radar data caused primarily by defractive

bending of the beam back down to the ground. This often happens in

areas where cool air interacts with prevailing warm air, such as along

coastlines and over oceans or other large bodies of water. Blocky and

linear features are characteristics of strobes within the displayed data.

4. Sun strobes occur when a radar antenna points directly at the sun.

This shows up as high reflectivity for one or two radials. Sun strobes are

shown as bright colored spikes on the display.

5. Military planes deploy metallic dust known as 'chaff' to diffuse their

radar signatures and mask their presence on radar. Pilots frequently

practice laying chaff trails over open ocean, although these trails often

drift over land causing alterations in weather radar scans.

6. When a solid object, such as a mountain, intersects a radar beam, it

blocks any reflectivity beyond that point and produces a shadow within

the display.

7. When a building near a NEXRAD site is taller than the tower on

which the radar antenna resides, it can block the beam, casting a long,

narrow shadow (blank space) in the display.

8. NEXRAD sites sometimes return data that is entirely spurious. This

is known as "going critical" and usually does not last longer than a few

hours.

9. Atmospheric temperature inversions cause radar returns from the

Earth's surface resulting in Anomalous Propagation (AP) echoes on the

radar display.

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-14

2-15 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

10. Echoes from migrating birds, bats, and insects will be displayed as

circular patterns of level 1 reflectivity centered near NEXRAD sites.

11. Significant variation in humidity with altitude can cause reflections

from the Earth's surface. These reflections are also displayed as large

circular or oval areas of uniform low intensity.

12. Differences will be noted between the base reflectivity (VDL) and

composite (XM) products. The base reflectivity product displays the

lower extent of cloud masses, so the extent of water droplets appears to

be less. The composite product provides more airborne water reflection

seen at higher angles as viewed from the NEXRAD ground sites, so

higher level features of the convective activity will be given. For example,

the “blowout” portion of thunderstorms (the anvil portion) containing high

altitude ice particles is often depicted as light precipitation and might be

confused for lower altitude light precipitation. Either base or composite

product provides an accurate, but somewhat time delayed depiction of

high levels of precipitation for fully developed or late stage thunder-

storms.

NEXRAD LIMITATIONS

The following are limitations on the use of NEXRAD data:

1. NEXRAD does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud

layers or precipitation characteristics (frozen vs. liquid, hail vs. rain, etc.),

nor does it provide information on turbulence, only the amount of

reflected energy from the precipitation.

2. The displayed NEXRAD product does not provide sufficient detail to

infer future weather trends. Due to delays involved in product creation

and transmittal, the pilot should always review the age bar to determine

information currency.

3. Due to NEXRAD site loca-

tion limitations, terrestrial block-

ages and outages, NEXRAD

coverage gaps exist.

Coverage gaps are displayed

as a cross hatched pattern as

shown in Figure 2-2. Lack of

reflectivity in a coverage gap

area should not be construed

as a lack of precipitation.

Coverage gaps are portrayed

identically on either VDL or XM.

4. The resolution of NEXRAD

VDL data is 4 kilometers (km). Thus, when zoomed in on the display,

each square block is 4 km in diameter. The intensity level reflected by

the square will be the highest level sampled within the 4 km area.

Figure 2-2

Value Added Service Weather Products

Coverage Gap

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-15

2-16 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Value Added Service Weather Products

Rev 4 Aug/2007

5. The resolution of NEXRAD XM data is 2 km. Thus, when zoomed in

on the display, each square block is 2 km on a side. The intensity level

reflected by the square will be the highest level sampled within the 2 km

area.

INTENSITY

Precipitation intensity is depicted using colors as follows:

Green Light Level 1 15-30 dBz (10-30 dBz for XM)

Yellow Moderate Level 2 30-40 dBz

Red Heavy Level 3-4 40-50 dBz

Magenta Extreme Level 5-8 50+ dBz

The NEXRAD dBz levels, descriptions and colors are consistent with

FAA guidelines.

Moving the joystick and pressing the LEGEND Softkey will display the

NEXRAD legend as shown in Figure 2-3 (FIS VDL) and 2-4 (XM WX).

The column labeled dBz is a measure of the radar echo intensity.

The strength of a radar return signal typically varies as a function of

distance (i.e., weaker from distant targets, stronger from those nearby)

and the object size.

Many weather sources avail-

able on the internet use color

coding that is different than

the KMD 250 color coding.

The dBz and intensity level

can be used to compare

intensity levels between dif-

ferent sources of NEXRAD

information since many

internet weather providers will

include a legend with dBz

values indicated.

No Data, as shown in the

legend, indicates the lack of

coverage for reasons dis-

cussed previously.

Figure 2-3

Figure 2-4

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-16

2-17 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

GRAPHICAL METAR

The graphical METAR is derived from the most currently received tex-

tual METAR or SPECI data from reporting sites. This is displayed on a

map background to enhance

situational awareness as

shown on Figure 2-5.

The graphical METAR icon is

gray when the textual METAR

or SPECI report exceeds 75

minutes (AGED), but is less

than the textual METAR

expiration time of 120 minutes.

Look at the textual report for

ceiling and visibility informa-

tion.

CAUTION: Graphical METAR data must be used for strategic plan-

ning purposes only. Due to inherent delays, areas of coverage

and relative age and availability of the data that can be experi-

enced, Graphical METAR data cannot be viewed as an absolute

depiction of conditions at a specific location.

Graphical METARs are shown using two color coded boxes, one indi-

cating ceiling (upper box), the other visibility (lower box). Next to the

boxes is the ICAO station identifier for the airport to which the METAR

pertains. Color coding for the boxes is specified in the table below:

Figure 2-5

Value Added Service Weather Products

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-17

2-18 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Value Added Service Weather Products

Rev 4 Aug/2007

Moving the joystick pointer to

an area that will not highlight a

specific report then pressing

the LEGEND Softkey will dis-

play the graphical METAR

legend as shown in Figure 2-6.

GRAPHICAL AIRMET

The graphical AIRMET is derived from the location description (if pro-

vided) in the textual AIRMET and displayed as a boundary box with the

appropriate color for the condition as shown in the legend (for a

description, see AIRMETs in the Basic Weather Services section). The

“IN” box in the legend indicates the current aircraft position is within the

corresponding forecast condition. The boundaries are displayed on a

map background to enhance situational awareness as shown on

Figure 2-7. Low Level Wind Shear and Freezing Level information will

not be displayed on the GRAPHICAL AIRMET; check the textual

AIRMETs for this information.

NOTE: If no location description is provided in the textual AIRMET the

AIRMET cannot be depicted graphically. These AIRMETs are denoted

by displaying the AIRMET identifier in green within the textual AIRMET.

Figure 2-6

Figure 2-7

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-18

2-19 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

GRAPHICAL SIGMET

The graphical SIGMET is derived from the location description in the

textual SIGMET and displayed as a boundary box with the appropriate

color for the condition (for a description, see SIGMETs in the Basic

Weather Services section). This is displayed on a map background to

enhance situational awareness as shown on Figure 2-8.

GRAPHICAL CONVECTIVE SIGMET

The graphical Convective SIGMET is derived from the location descrip-

tion in the textual Convective SIGMET and displayed as a yellow

boundary box (for a description, see CONVECTIVE SIGMETs in the

Basic Weather Services section). The “IN” box in the legend indicates

the current aircraft position is within the corresponding forecast condi-

tion. The boundaries are displayed on a map background to enhance

situational awareness as shown on Figure 2-9.

Figure 2-8

Figure 2-9

Value Added Service Weather Products

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-19

2-20 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Value Added Service Weather Products

Rev 4 Aug/2007

GRAPHICAL ALERT WEATHER WATCHES (VDL ONLY)

The graphical Alert Weather Watches (AWWs) are derived from the

location description in the textual AWW and displayed as a boundary

box with the appropriate color for the condition as shown in the legend

(for a description, see ALERT WEATHER WATCHES in the Basic

Weather Services section). The “IN” box in the legend indicates the

current aircraft position is within the corresponding forecast condition.

The boundaries are displayed on a map background to enhance situa-

tional awareness as shown on Figure 2-10.

Figure 2-10

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-20

Rev 4 Aug/2007 2-21

SUBSCRIPTIONS

A current subscription (VDL or XM) and a current data card (VDL only)

are required to receive services. Subscriptions are used to gain access

to services. Some VDL services are offered at no cost and others are fee

based. All XM weather services are provided on a fee basis. All services

not identified as VDL only are available with an XM subscription.

VDL SUBSCRIPTIONS

Obtaining a VDL subscription can be performed via website,

(http://www.bendixking.com) select Wingman Services, Data Link

Weather, or alternatively by contacting Wingman Services at 800-247-

0230 (or 913-712-3145). During this process, you will have the option to

subscribe to fee-based products, such as NEXRAD, Graphical METARs,

Graphical AIRMETs, Graphical SIGMETs, Graphical Convective

SIGMETs, Graphical AWWs and/or may choose to subscribe to basic

textual products, such as TAFs, METARs/SPECIs, PIREPs, AIRMETs,

SIGMETs, Convective SIGMETs and AWWs, which are free-of-charge.

NOTE: Although the basic textual products are free of charge, they still

require a subscription as well as a current data card to receive the ser-

vice.

To accommodate users with varying service needs (for example, during

different flying seasons over the course of a year), the display unit allows

storage for up to four individual subscriptions, in much the same way that

a computer can support multiple user accounts with different passwords.

Once entered, the display unit manages selection of the appropriate sub-

scription without any operator intervention. A subscription code must be

entered into the display unit whenever you add or renew a subscription.

When subscribing for a FIS VDL service package, you may specify the

date when service shall commence and the duration. If you subscribe to

multiple packages, the start date and duration of each can differ (if

desired). For instance, a user may select the free text weather package

for an entire year and also choose a graphical weather package for part

of the year.

During the subscription process, you will receive 1 to 4 subscription

codes which you must enter into your display unit to permit access to all

products. A subscription code is an alphanumeric sequence that permits

access to the FIS VDL broadcast network in much the same way that a

computer password permits access to a computer network. When you

subscribe for FIS services, the online system will ask for a FIS Display ID

in order to provide you with the subscription code. The FIS Display ID is

a unique alphanumeric serial number associated with your display unit.

This ID is obtained by viewing the FIS VDL Subscription Status page on

your display unit. After obtaining the subscription code (from either

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

FIS Subscriptions

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-21

FIS Subscriptions

Select the desired

services

Go to Bendixking.com

or call 1-800-247-0230

to subscribe to FIS Services

Get Display ID

from unit in airplane

Receive Subscription

Code(s) and print them

out

Take printed out code(s)

to the airplane and enter

code(s) on the FIS Subscription

Status Page

Update Data Card if needed.

Update at least once per year

to ensure continued FIS Services

Enjoy flying with FIS

Services!

Enter Display ID during

registration

(This is only required first

time you subscribe)

How to Subscribe to FIS VDL Services

2-22

www.bendixking.com or via a phone call to Wingman Services), enter

this code into your display unit. The subscription code tells the display

the service(s) to which you have subscribed and for what period of time.

Also, the data card must be updated at least once a year for continuance

of FIS subscription service. The validity period for the subscription data

on the data card is shown on the FIS Caution page at power on and also

on the FIS Subscription Status Page. The data card contains both sub-

scription data that is needed to access FIS products as well as the latest

operating software. By updating the data card at least once a year prior

to the expiration date you will ensure uninterrupted FIS service and also

have the latest version of software to utilize new FIS products as they

become available. Note that data card updates are available every 28

days and also include the latest version of Jeppesen navigation data.

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-22

2-23

SETTING UP A FIS VDL SUBSCRIPTION

At least one subscription must be set up, even to receive the no-charge

services. Up to four different concurrent subscriptions can be set up

depending on the service packages desired.

NOTE: Entering more than four subscriptions will cause previous sub-

scriptions to be overwritten.

NOTE: The following details require selection of a KDR-510 as the

source for datalink weather data.

To set up a subscription, per-

form the following steps:

1. Press the MENU Key to dis-

play the AUX MENU Softkey

as shown in Figure 2-11.

2. Press the AUX MENU

Softkey to display the AUX-

MAIN MENU Page as shown in

Figure 2-12.

3. Turn the Rotary Knob or

move the Joystick to move the

cursor to select FIS

Subscription as shown in

Figure 2-12.

4. Press the SELECT Softkey

to display the AUX-FIS SUB-

SCRIPTION Page as shown in

Figure 2-13. On initial sub-

scription setup the subscription

window will show only blank

spaces as shown in Figure 2-

13, unless services were pre-

provisioned at the factory. In

this case some lines may not

be blank. If adding another

subscription, one or more pre-

vious subscriptions may be dis-

played with the associated

validity period and status.

The unique identifier for the

individual KMD 250 is dis-

played in the FIS DISPLAY ID

window. The unique ID shown

here is 0H100 11KSH.

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

FIS Subscriptions

Figure 2-11

Figure 2-12

Figure 2-13

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-23

2-24 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

Obtain the unique ID for your

system and visit the Wingman

Services website on

www.bendixking.com or call 1-

800-247-0230. This ID will be

used to obtain a Subscription

Code.

NOTE: For uninterrupted FIS

services, the data card must be

updated by the date shown in

“DATA CARD UPDATE

REQUIRED BY” field.

5. After obtaining the

Subscription Code, press the

ADD SUBSCR softkey to dis-

play Figure 2-14

6. The Rotary Knob selects the

alphanumeric character and

the Joystick selects the char-

acter position. Turn the Rotary

Knob until the first character of

the Subscription Code is dis-

played in first space. Push the

Joystick to the right to move to

the next space to the right.

Turn the Rotary Knob until the

second character of the

Subscription Code is displayed.

Continue this sequence until

the entire Subscription Code

has been entered as shown in

Figure 2-15.

After selecting the last char-

acter space of the Subscription

Code the ENTER Softkey will

be available.

7. After entering the last Subscription Code character, press the ENTER

Softkey. The subscription should be accepted and processed as shown

in Figure 2-16.

Figure 2-14

Figure 2-15

Figure 2-16

FIS Subscriptions

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-24

2-25

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

If an incorrect code has been

entered, a notification like that

shown in Figure 2-17 will be

displayed.

8. After the subscription has

been accepted, Figure 2-18 will

be displayed showing the sub-

scription validity period and

status. If the subscription has

been entered prior to the begin-

ning of subscription service, the

entered subscription will begin

when subscription services are

turned on.

CHECKING FIS VDL SUB-

SCRIPTIONS

To check FIS VDL subscription

validity or status perform the

following steps:

1. Repeat steps 1 through 4 in

the Setting Up a FIS VDL

Subscription section.

2. A screen similar to Figure 2-18 should be displayed. In this case sub-

scription #1 is valid and no other subscriptions have been entered.

The symbols that may appear in the Status column, and their meanings,

are shown in Figure 2-19. Again, subscriptions will only be valid when

FIS subscription service is turned on.

NOTE: Only the validity period for subscriptions is shown on the display.

To determine which products are available with each subscription,

access the account on Wingman Services at www.bendixking.com.

FIS Subscriptions

Figure 2-17

Figure 2-18

Figure 2-19

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-25

2-26

Section 2

FIS Operation

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

XM WX SUBSCRIPTIONS

An XM subscription must be set up to receive XM WX services. This

process involves accessing the XM Radio website and a toll-free phone

call to XM Radio.

SETTING UP AN XM WX SUBSCRIPTION

NOTE: The following details require selection of an XM receiver (such

as a KDR-610) as the source for datalink weather data.

Setting up an XM WX subscription can be accomplished by following

these steps:

1a. Retrieve the 8-digit ID from the KDR 610 label (should be attached to

the opposite end of the receiver from the connectors).

1b. Apply power to the display and receiver, select the MENU key and

the AUX MENU softkey. The SELECT AUX PAGE is shown on the

screen. Scroll down to FIS Subscription so it is highlighted as shown in

Figure 2-20. Select the SELECT softkey and record the 8-digit receiver

ID displayed at the bottom of the FIS Subscription Status page.

2. Go to the website

www.xmradio.com/weather

select your weather subscrip-

tion package.

3. Apply power to the XM

receiver, and place the

receiver’s antenna where the

signal can be received from the

XM satellites. Make certain the

antenna has a good view of the

southern horizon.

4. With the Receiver ID and desired subscription package in hand, con-

tact XM Radio at 1-800-985-9200 for assistance in activating your

receiver and setting up a weather product subscription. The receiver

should remain in view of the satellites during the subscription process.

5.Verify the activation of the receiver and the subscription validity by

selecting and viewing the “FIS Subscription Status Page” on the KMD

screen.

If for any reason the receiver was not exposed to the XM signal within

the initial 24 hour broadcast period, or is not successfully authorized for

some other reason, a subsequent 15 minute resend of the subscription

information can be obtained. Get the receiver ID (instructions in step 1a

or 1b above), go to the website

http://www.xmradio.com/refresh/

, and

Rev 4 Aug/2007

Figure 2-20

FIS Subscriptions

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-26

2-27 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

follow the instructions.

CHECKING XM WX

SUBSCRIPTIONS

To check the FIS XM subscrip-

tion and receiver status, apply

power to the display and

receiver, select the MENU key,

then the AUX MENU softkey,

which opens the SELECT AUX

PAGE. Scroll down to FIS

Subscription so it is highlighted,

and finally select the SELECT

softkey, as in step 1b previ-

ously.

The Application IDs are displayed along with the receiver activation and

subscription status as shown in Figure 2-21. The Application IDs provide

the groupings of products that are part of th subscription package. Green

checkmarks indicate those App IDs or product groups that are contained

in the subscription package for the XM receiver. Contact XM Radio at 1-

800-985-9200 with the App ID information if the subscribed products are

not received and displayed.

Rev 4 Aug/2007

Figure 2-21

Symbol Subscription Status Description

(white) No Information

The XM FIS receiver subscription

information message has not

been received.

Not Subscribed

The user is not authorized for the

Application ID.

Subscribed

The user is authorized for the

Application ID.

FIS Subscriptions

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-27

2-28

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

FIS Subscriptions

Intentionally left blank

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-28

2-29

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

NORMAL OPERATION

To display the FIS pages, press the WX Function Select Key. Each

press will cycle through the FIS Graphics Page, FIS Text Page and

Stormscope® (if installed).

In the graphical weather products, each option can be selected in one of

two ways. The first is using the menu as shown in the following steps:

1. Press the MENU Key to display Figure 2-22.

2. Press the CHOOSE PRODUCT Softkey to display

Figure 2-23 (Figure 2-24 for XM).

3. Using the Rotary Knob or

Joystick, scroll to the desired

product and press the SELECT

Softkey.

This method allows for easily

moving between graphical and

textual weather products. It

also makes it easy to quickly

identify any weather products

that have not been received by

the KMD 250. These will

appear “grayed out” and will not

be selectable.

The second method of selecting options can be used for cycling through

only the graphical products. If presently viewing a graphic product dis-

play, simply turn the Rotary Knob. Each click will select the next graphic

display.

Normal Operation

Stormscope®

☞

*Only if Stormscope® is installed

Datalink Wx

Graphical

Products

Datalink Wx

Textual

Products

Figure 2-22

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-29

2-30

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

NOTE: The KMD 250 will only

allow for selection and display

of products for which data has

been received. If a desired

product is not available, it may

be that the data has not yet

been received or to which

there is no subscription. Wx

Watches and PIREPs are not

available for XM WX and will

not be listed

Normal Operation

Figure 2-24

Figure 2-23

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-30

2-31 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

NEXRAD PAGE

The following illustration describes the NEXRAD VDL display. The

NEXRAD XM display is the same except the FIS Icon is different and

Composite Reflectivity is shown instead of Base Reflectivity.

Rev 4 Aug/2007

1 Display Range - RNG:####.

2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and

displayed.

3 North Pointer

4 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position. Stylized airplane when

heading/track input is present, a plus symbol with no heading/track.

5 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is one

half the selected range.

6 RESET STICK Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

7 Precipitation - NEXRAD precipitation returns.

8 LEGEND Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

9 Age of Data and Status Bar - The age of the data is displayed in minutes

based on current time minus the NEXRAD issue time. The colored bar

indicates percentage of age versus elapsed time before expiration. The bar

will be green the first 50% then turn yellow. Also, note in this example that

the maximum age allowed for the display of this data is 75 minutes.

10 Rotary Knob Active - When displayed on the graphical weather products

pages, rotating the knob will cycle through the products.

11 Current Selection - Displays the name of the weather product currently being

viewed.

3 4 5

11 10

Normal Operation

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-31

2-32

Section 2

FIS Operation

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

NEXRAD PAGE OPERATIONAL CONTROLS

CAUTION: NEXRAD data must only be used for strategic planning

purposes. Due to inherent delays and relative age of the data that

can be experienced, NEXRAD data cannot be used for tactical

avoidance of weather.

WX Function Select Key - Cycles through Graphical

Weather Products, Textual Weather Products and

Stormscope®.

Rotary Knob - Turning the Rotary Knob cycles

through the graphical NEXRAD, METAR, AIRMET,

SIGMET, Convective SIGMET, Alert Weather Watches

and FIS Network Status Pages.

Joystick - Moving the Joystick allows panning of the

map and placement of the pointer over the desired

weather activity to be viewed.

RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼- Displays ZOOMING TO ### nm and

advances the indicator to the next range. The upper button

increases range, the lower button decreases it. The

selected range is displayed in the lower left corner of the

display with the outer range ring the displayed range and

the inner range ring is half the displayed range.

USING THE NEXRAD PAGE

1. Press the WX Function

Select Key until the FIS

Graphics Page is displayed. If

necessary, turn the Rotary

Knob to obtain the NEXRAD

Base Reflectivity display as

shown in Figure 2-25.

NEXRAD Base Reflectivity

(NEXRAD Composite

Reflectivity for XM) will be dis-

played at the bottom of the dis-

play.

NOTE: If a notification such as that shown in Figure 2-26 is displayed, it

may be that the system has not had time to acquire a signal or has

acquired a signal and not yet received all the data for a NEXRAD image.

If this notification is still present after more than 5-10 minutes, while in an

area of expected coverage, refer to the FIS NOTIFICATIONS in this sec-

tion.

Rev 4 Aug/2007

Normal Operation

Figure 2-25

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-32

2-33

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Always make note of the age of

the data displayed in the

bottom right corner (see Figure

2-25). Remember, the older

the age the more suspect the

accuracy of the data. The col-

ored bar will be green the first

50% of the expiration time

period for the displayed data

then turn yellow. Also, delays

occurring prior to the weather

distributor time stamping the

data are not reflected in the dis-

played age. These delays can

range from one to seven min-

utes.

If no data update has been

received for 75 minutes the

NEXRAD image is discarded

and no longer displayed.

2. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼

Key to zoom in or out on the

display. The map is centered

on the present position indi-

cated by the symbolic aircraft.

3. To view a specific area of

weather, move the joystick in

the desired direction. A pointer

will appear on the display (see

Figure 2-27). The distance and

bearing between present posi-

tion and the pointer is shown at

the bottom of the display. As

the joystick is held the pointer

will continue to move. When

the pointer reaches the edge of

the display the map will pan to keep up with pointer

movement. Release the joystick to stop moving the

pointer. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼keys to zoom in

or out on the pointer position.

Pressing the LEGEND Softkey will display the VDL

NEXRAD LEGEND as in Figure 2-28 (or the XM

NEXRAD LEGEND as in Figure 2-29). Press the

CLEAR Softkey to clear the legend from the display.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-26

Figure 2-27

Figure 2-28

Figure 2-29

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-33

2-34

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Press the RESET STICK Softkey to return to the present position dis-

play. If no actions are taken for a period of 30 seconds, the display will

return to the present position.

GRAPHICAL METARS PAGE

The following illustration describes the Graphical METARs display. The

only difference between VDL and XM is the FIS function status icon.

Normal Operation

1 Display Range - RNG:####.

2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and

displayed.

3 North Pointer

4 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position. Stylized airplane when

heading/track input is present, a plus symbol with no heading/track.

5 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is one

half the selected range.

6 RESET STICK Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

7 Graphical METAR Icon - Ceiling indicated in top box, visibiliy in bottom box

and ICAO identifier of issuing airport. Note that ICAO identifiers are not

displayed on all range settings.

8 MORE INFO Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick Pointer is positioned

over a METAR Icon. Pressing this Softkey will display more information.

9 LEGEND Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

10 METAR Color Key - Colors indicating flight rules pertaining to ceiling and

visibility.

11 Rotary Knob Active - When displayed on the graphical weather products

pages, rotating the knob will cycle through the products.

12 Current Selection - Displays the name of the weather product currently being

viewed.

3 4 5

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-34

2-35

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

GRAPHICAL METARS PAGE OPERATIONAL CONTROLS

WX Function Select Key - Cycles through Graphical

Weather Products, Textual Weather Products and

Stormscope®.

Rotary Knob - Turning the Rotary Knob cycles

through the graphical NEXRAD, METAR, AIRMET,

SIGMET, Convective SIGMET, Alert Weather Watches

and FIS Network Status Pages.

Joystick - Moving the Joystick allows panning of the

map and placement of the pointer over the desired

weather activity to be viewed.

RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼- Displays ZOOMING TO ### nm and

advances the indicator to the next range. The upper button

increases range, the lower button decreases it. The

selected range is displayed in the lower left corner of the

display with the outer range ring the displayed range and

the inner range ring is half the displayed range.

USING THE GRAPHICAL METARS PAGE

1. Press the WX Function

Select Key until the FIS

Graphics Page is displayed. If

necessary, turn the Rotary

Knob to obtain the Graphical

METAR display similar to

Figure 2-30. Graphical

METARs will be displayed at

the bottom of the display.

NOTE: This page will not be

accessible until a valid FIS

signal has been acquired and

processed by the system.

2. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼Key to zoom in on the display. The map is

centered on the present position indicated by the symbolic aircraft.

3. To view a specific METAR, move the joystick in the desired direction.

A pointer will appear on the display. The distance and bearing between

present position and the pointer is shown at the bottom center of the dis-

play (see Figure 2-31). As the joystick is held the pointer will continue to

move. When the pointer reaches the edge of the display the map will

pan to keep up with pointer movement. Release the joystick to stop

moving the pointer. When the pointer moves over a graphical METAR

icon, a box will pop up containing the IDENT, NAME and CITY/STATE

Normal Operation

Figure 2-30

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-35

2-36

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

pertaining to the location and

the AGE of the report (see

Figure 2-32).

4. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼

keys to zoom in or out on the

pointer position.

5. Press the MORE INFO

Softkey to display the Text

METAR Page for the displayed

location as in Figure 2-33.

6. Press the RETURN TO

MAP Softkey to return to the

previous display.

7. Press the RESET STICK

Softkey to return to the present

position display. If no actions

are taken for a period of 30

seconds, the display will return

to the aircraft present position

display.

8. To view the GRAPHICAL

METAR LEGEND, move the

joystick pointer to an area with

no icons and press the

LEGEND Softkey. The legend

will be displayed as in Figure 2-

34. Press the CLEAR Softkey

to remove the legend from the

display.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-32

Figure 2-33

Figure 2-31

Figure 2-34

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-36

2-37

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

GRAPHICAL AIRMETS PAGE

The following illustration describes the Graphical AIRMETs display. The

only difference between VDL and XM is the FIS function status icon.

Normal Operation

1 Display Range - RNG:####.

2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and

displayed.

3 North Pointer

4 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position. Stylized airplane when

heading/track input is present, a plus symbol with no heading/track.

5 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is one

half the selected range.

6 RESET STICK Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

7 AIRMET Boundary - Color coded line indicating the boundaries of an AIRMET.

8 MORE INFO Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick Pointer is positioned

over an AIRMET boundary line. Pressing this Softkey will display more

information.

9 LEGEND Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

10 Boundary Color Key - Colors indicate the type of weather phenomenon.

11 IN - Indicates the current aircraft position is “IN” a turbulence AIRMET.

12 Rotary Knob Active - When displayed on the graphical weather products

pages, rotating the knob will cycle through the products.

13 Current Selection - Displays the name of the weather product currently being

viewed.

3 4 5

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-37

2-38

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

GRAPHICAL AIRMETS PAGE OPERATIONAL CONTROLS

WX Function Select Key - Cycles through Graphical

Weather Products, Textual Weather Products and

Stormscope®.

Rotary Knob - Turning the Rotary Knob cycles through

the graphical NEXRAD, METAR, AIRMET, SIGMET,

Convective SIGMET, Alert Weather Watches and FIS

Network Status Pages.

Joystick - Moving the Joystick allows panning of the

map and placement of the pointer over the desired

weather activity to be viewed.

RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼- Displays ZOOMING TO ### nm and

advances the indicator to the next range. The upper button

increases range, the lower button decreases it. The

selected range is displayed in the lower left corner of the

display with the outer range ring the displayed range and

the inner range ring is half the displayed range.

USING THE GRAPHICAL AIRMETS PAGE

1. Press the WX Function

Select Key until the FIS

Graphics Page is displayed. If

necessary, turn the Rotary

Knob to obtain the Graphical

AIRMETs display similar to

Figure 2-35. AIRMETs will be

displayed at the bottom of the

display.

NOTE: This page will not be

accessible until a valid FIS

signal has been acquired and

processed by the system.

2. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼Key to zoom in on the display. The map is

centered on the present position indicated by the symbolic aircraft.

3. To view a specific AIRMET, move the joystick in the desired direction

and place the pointer on the desired AIRMET border (see Figure 2-36).

A box will pop up containing the AIRMET designator, TYPE and the

AGE of the report.

4. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼keys to zoom in or out on the pointer posi-

tion.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-35

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-38

2-39

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

5. Press the MORE INFO

Softkey to display the Text

AIRMET Page for the displayed

location as in Figure 2-37.

6. Press the RETURN TO

MAP Softkey to return to the

previous display.

7. Press the RESET STICK

Softkey to return to the present

position display. If no actions

are taken for a period of 30 sec-

onds, the display will return to

the aircraft present position dis-

play.

8. To view the AIRMET

LEGEND, move the joystick to

display the LEGEND Softkey.

Press the LEGEND Softkey

and the legend will be dis-

played as in Figure 2-38.

Press the CLEAR Softkey to

remove the legend from the

display.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-36

Figure 2-37

Figure 2-38

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-39

2-40

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

GRAPHICAL SIGMETS PAGE

The following illustration describes the Graphical SIGMETs display. The

only difference between VDL and XM is the FIS function status icon.

Normal Operation

1 Display Range - RNG:####.

2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and

displayed.

3 SIGMET Boundary - Color coded line indicating the boundaries of a SIGMET.

4 North Pointer

5 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position. Stylized airplane when

heading/track input is present, a plus symbol with no heading/track.

6 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is one

half the selected range.

7 RESET STICK Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

8 MORE INFO Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick Pointer is positioned

over a SIGMET boundary line. Pressing this Softkey will display more

information.

9 LEGEND Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

10 Boundary Color Key - Colors indicate the type of weather phenomenon.

11 Rotary Knob Active - When displayed on the graphical weather products

pages, rotating the knob will cycle through the products.

12 Current Selection - Displays the name of the weather product currently being

viewed.

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-40

2-41

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

GRAPHICAL SIGMETS PAGE OPERATIONAL CONTROLS

WX Function Select Key - Cycles through Graphical

Weather Products, Textual Weather Products and

Stormscope®.

Rotary Knob - Turning the Rotary Knob cycles through

the graphical NEXRAD, METAR, AIRMET, SIGMET,

Convective SIGMET, Alert Weather Watches and FIS

Network Status Pages.

Joystick - Moving the Joystick allows panning of the

map and placement of the pointer over the desired

weather activity to be viewed.

RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼- Displays ZOOMING TO ### nm and

advances the indicator to the next range. The upper button

increases range, the lower button decreases it. The selected

range is displayed in the lower left corner of the display with

the outer range ring the displayed range and the inner range

ring is half the displayed range.

USING THE GRAPHICAL SIGMETS PAGE

1. Press the WX Function

Select Key until the FIS

Graphics Page is displayed. If

necessary, turn the Rotary

Knob to obtain the Graphical

SIGMETs display similar to

Figure 2-39. SIGMETs will be

displayed at the bottom of the

display.

NOTE: This page will not be

accessible until a valid FIS

signal has been acquired and

processed by the system.

2. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼Key to zoom in on the display. The map is

centered on the present position indicated by the symbolic aircraft.

3. To view a specific SIGMET, move the joystick in the desired direction

and place the pointer on the desired SIGMET border (see Figure 2-40).

A box will pop up containing the SIGMET designator, TYPE and the

AGE of the report.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-39

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-41

2-42

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

4. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼

keys to zoom in or out on the

pointer position.

5. Press the MORE INFO

Softkey to display the Text

SIGMET Page for the dis-

played location as in Figure 2-

41.

6. Press the RETURN TO

MAP Softkey to return to the

previous display.

7. Press the RESET STICK

Softkey to return to the present

position display. If no actions

are taken for a period of 30 sec-

onds, the display will return to

the aircraft present position dis-

play.

8. To view the SIGMET

LEGEND, move the joystick to

display the LEGEND Softkey.

Press the LEGEND Softkey

and the legend will be displayed

as in Figure 2-42. Press the

CLEAR Softkey to remove the

legend from the display.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-41

Figure 2-42

Figure 2-40

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-42

2-43

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

GRAPHICAL CONVECTIVE SIGMETS PAGE

The following illustration describes the Graphical Convective SIGMETs

display. The only difference between VDL and XM is the FIS function

status icon.

Normal Operation

1 Display Range - RNG:####.

2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and

displayed.

3 Convective SIGMET Boundary - Yellow line indicates the boundaries of a

Convective SIGMET.

4 North Pointer

5 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position. Stylized airplane when

heading/track input is present, a plus symbol with no heading/track.

6 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is one

half the selected range.

7 RESET STICK Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

8 MORE INFO Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick Pointer is positioned

over a boundary line. Pressing this Softkey will display more information.

9 LEGEND Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

10 Boundary Color Key - Colors indicating type of weather phenomenon.

11 Rotary Knob Active - When displayed on the graphical weather products

pages, rotating the knob will cycle through the products.

12 Current Selection - Displays the name of the weather product currently being

viewed.

4 5 6

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-43

2-44

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

GRAPHICAL CONVECTIVE SIGMETS PAGE OPERATIONAL

CONTROLS

WX Function Select Key - Cycles through Stormscope®,

Graphical Weather Products and Textual Weather

Products.

Rotary Knob - Turning the Rotary Knob cycles

through the graphical NEXRAD, METAR, AIRMET,

SIGMET, Convective SIGMET, Alert Weather Watches

and FIS Network Status Pages.

Joystick - Moving the Joystick allows panning of the

map and placement of the pointer over the desired

weather activity to be viewed.

RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼- Displays ZOOMING TO ### nm and

advances the indicator to the next range. The upper button

increases range, the lower button decreases it. The

selected range is displayed in the lower left corner of the

display with the outer range ring the displayed range and

the inner range ring is half the displayed range.

USING THE GRAPHICAL CONVECTIVE SIGMETS PAGE

1. Press the WX Function

Select Key until the FIS

Graphics Page is displayed. If

necessary, turn the Rotary

Knob to obtain the Graphical

Convective SIGMETs display

similar to Figure 2-43.

Convective SIGMETs will be

displayed at the bottom of the

display.

NOTE: This page will not be

accessible until a valid FIS

signal has been acquired and

processed by the system.

2. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼Key to zoom in on the display. The map is

centered on the present position indicated by the symbolic aircraft.

3. To view a specific Convective SIGMET, move the joystick in the

desired direction and place the pointer on the desired Convective

SIGMET border (see Figure 2-44). A box will pop up containing the

Convective SIGMET designator, TYPE and the AGE of the report.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-43

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-44

2-45

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

4. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼

keys to zoom in or out on the

pointer position.

5. Press the MORE INFO

Softkey to display the Text

Convective SIGMET Page for

the displayed location as in

Figure 2-45.

6. Press the RETURN TO

MAP Softkey to return to the

previous display.

7. Press the RESET STICK

Softkey to return to the present

position display. If no actions

are taken for a period of 30

seconds, the display will return

to the aircraft present position

display.

8. To view the CONV SIGMET

LEGEND, move the joystick to

display the LEGEND Softkey.

Press the LEGEND Softkey and

the legend will be displayed as

in Figure 2-46. Press the

CLEAR Softkey to remove the

legend from the display.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-45

Figure 2-46

Figure 2-44

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-45

2-46

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

GRAPHICAL ALERT WEATHER WATCHES PAGE (AWW)

(VDL ONLY)

The following illustration describes the Graphical Alert Weather Watches

(AWW) display.

Normal Operation

1 Display Range - RNG:####.

2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and

displayed.

3 Weather Watch Boundary - Color coded line indicates the boundaries and

type of Weather Watch.

4 North Pointer

5 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position. Stylized airplane when

heading/track input is present, a plus symbol with no heading/track.

6 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is one

half the selected range.

7 RESET STICK Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

8 MORE INFO Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick Pointer is positioned

over a boundary line. Pressing this Softkey will display more information.

9 LEGEND Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

10 Boundary Color Key - Colors indicating type of weather phenomenon.

11 Rotary Knob Active - When displayed on the graphical weather products

pages, rotating the knob will cycle through the products.

12 Current Selection - Displays the name of the weather product currently being

viewed.

4 5 6

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-46

2-47

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

GRAPHICAL WEATHER WATCHES PAGE OPERATIONAL

CONTROLS

WX Function Select Key - Cycles through Graphical

Weather Products, Textual Weather Products and

Stormscope®.

Rotary Knob - Turning the Rotary Knob cycles through

the graphical NEXRAD, METAR, AIRMET, SIGMET,

Convective SIGMET, Alert Weather Watches and FIS

Network Status Pages.

Joystick - Moving the Joystick allows panning of the

map and placement of the pointer over the desired

weather activity to be viewed.

RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼- Displays ZOOMING TO ### nm and

advances the indicator to the next range. The upper button

increases range, the lower button decreases it. The

selected range is displayed in the lower left corner of the

display with the outer range ring the displayed range and

the inner range ring is half the displayed range.

USING THE GRAPHICAL WEATHER WATCHES PAGE

1. Press the WX Function

Select Key until the FIS

Graphics Page is displayed. If

necessary, turn the Rotary

Knob to obtain the Graphical

Weather Watches display sim-

ilar to Figure 2-47. Weather

Watches (AWW) will be dis-

played at the bottom of the dis-

play.

NOTE: This page will not be

accessible until a valid FIS

signal has been acquired and

processed by the system.

2. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼Key to zoom in on the display. The map is

centered on the present position indicated by the symbolic aircraft.

3. To view a specific Weather Watch, move the joystick in the desired

direction and place the pointer on the desired Weather Watch border

(see Figure 2-48). A box will pop up containing the Weather Watch des-

ignator, TYPE and the AGE of the report.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-47

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-47

2-48

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

4. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼

keys to zoom in or out on the

pointer position.

5. Press the MORE INFO

Softkey to display the Text

Weather Watch Page for the

displayed location as in Figure

2-49.

6. Press the RETURN TO

MAP Softkey to return to the

previous display.

7. Press the RESET STICK

Softkey to return to the present

position display. If no actions

are taken for a period of 30

seconds, the display will return

to the aircraft present position

display.

8. To view the Wx WATCH

(AWW) LEGEND, move the

joystick to display the LEGEND

Softkey. Press the LEGEND

Softkey and the legend will be

displayed as in Figure 2-50.

Press the CLEAR Softkey to

remove the legend from the

display.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-48

Figure 2-49

Figure 2-50

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-48

2-49

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

FIS NETWORK STATUS PAGE (VDL ONLY)

The FIS Network Status Page displays the location and identifier of

installed ground stations. This page can also be used to determine

which stations are being received and the status of each station.

The following illustration describes the FIS Network Status Page display.

Normal Operation

1 Display Range - RNG:####.

2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and

displayed.

3 North Pointer

4 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position. Stylized airplane when

heading/track input is present, a plus symbol with no heading/track.

5 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is one

half the selected range.

6 RESET STICK Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.

7 FIS Station Icon - Color coded icon indicates station location and status. The

“starburst” indicates station currently being received.

8 Color Key - Ground station status legend.

UNKNOWN indicates the station status is unknown. If network status information

has not been recently received, all sites will be shown as UNKNOWN in white

at their last known location.

OK indicates the station is broadcasting current information.

CHECK AGE indicates the station is operating, but may not be broadcasting

the most recent information. Check the age of the data before using.

OFFLINE indicates the station is known to be offline.

9 Rotary Knob Active - When displayed on the graphical weather products

pages, rotating the knob will cycle through the products.

10 Current Selection - Displays the name of the weather product currently being

viewed.

3 4 5

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-49

2-50

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

FIS NETWORK STATUS PAGE OPERATIONAL CONTROLS

WX Function Select Key - Cycles through Graphical

Weather Products, Textual Weather Products and

Stormscope®.

Rotary Knob - Turning the Rotary Knob cycles

through the graphical NEXRAD, METAR, AIRMET,

SIGMET, Convective SIGMET, Alert Weather Watches

and FIS Network Status Pages.

Joystick - Moving the Joystick allows panning of the

map and placement of the pointer over the desired

weather activity to be viewed.

RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼- Displays ZOOMING TO ### nm and

advances the indicator to the next range. The upper button

increases range, the lower button decreases it. The

selected range is displayed in the lower left corner of the

display with the outer range ring the displayed range and

the inner range ring is half the displayed range.

USING THE FIS NET-

WORK STATUS PAGE

1. Press the WX Function

Select Key until the FIS

Graphics Page is displayed. If

necessary, turn the Rotary

Knob to obtain the FIS

Network Status display similar

to Figure 2-51. FIS Network

Status will be displayed at the

bottom of the display.

2. Press the RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼

Key to zoom in on the display.

The map is centered on the

present position indicated by

the symbolic aircraft.

3. To view a specific FIS

Network station move the joy-

stick in the desired direction

and place the pointer on the

desired station icon (see

Figure 2-52). A box will pop up

containing the FIS TRANSMITTER IDENTIFIER and STATUS.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-51

Figure 2-52

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-50

2-51

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

4. Press the RESET STICK Softkey to return to the present position dis-

play. If no actions are taken for a period of 30 seconds, the display will

return to the aircraft present position display.

NOTE: At any given moment the FIS receiver may not be receiving the

closest transmitting site. This is not a problem since all stations transmit

the same data.

Visit Wingman Services at www.bendixking.com to view the latest infor-

mation about network transmitter locations and to cross-reference

ground station IDs with the location names.

Normal Operation

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-51

2-52

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

FIS TEXTUAL WEATHER PRODUCTS

The following illustration describes the FIS Textual Products display. The

only difference between VDL and XM is the FIS function status icon.

Normal Operation

1Report Range - RNG:####. Pressing the RNG▲/RNG▼ Key will change the

distance radius from the selected FILTER AREA in which available reports will

be listed. In this case all available METARs with a 50 mile radius of KJHW

will be listed in the AVAILABLE METARS field.

2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available (black)

and displayed (color).

3 Selected Report Info - Displays identifier, name, city and state of selected

report. This field is only displayed for METARs, TAFs and PIREPs when available.

4 Available Reports - Shows available reports based on the selection

in the FILTER AREA field. Special, urgent or amended reports are

highlighted in yellow. Horizontal movement of the joystick will move the

cursor over the next report in the field. The presence of a scroll bar

indicates more reports are available, but not displayed.

5 Filter Area Selection - Pressing the CHANGE AREA Softkey cycles

between Destination, Flightplan WPT, Nearest and User Defined.

6 Knob Active - When displayed, the Rotary Knob can be used to select

an identifier from the database or Flightplan. This is only available when

User Defined or FPL WPT is selected.

7 Selected Identifier - Indicates the currently selected identifier.

8 UTC - Current UTC time.

9 METAR MAP Softlabel - In this case, when this key is pressed the graphical

METAR page is displayed with the map centered on the selected METAR.

This softkey corresponds to the currently selected textual product, i.e

METAR MAP. This is only available when valid data is being received.

10 Change Area Softlabel - Cycles the FILTER AREA field between

Destination, Flightplan Waypoint (FPL WPT), Nearest and User Defined.

11 Text Field - The encoded weather report is displayed in this field.

12 CHOOSE PRODUCT Softlabel - Pressing this softkey will display the

SELECT WX PRODUCT window. Use the Rotary Knob or Joystick to

highlight the desired product and press SELECT.

13 Current Selected - Indicates the currently selected weather product.

14 Age of Report- Age of report based on UTC time minus time of report.

The colored bar indicates percentage of age versus elapsed time before

expiration. The bar will be green the first 50% then turn yellow.

310

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-52

2-53

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

FIS TEXTUAL PRODUCTS OPERATIONAL CONTROLS

WX Function Select Key - Cycles through Graphical

Weather Products, Textual Weather Products and

Stormscope®.

MAP Softkey - Depending on which tex-

tual product is currently being viewed, this

softkey will be labeled for corresponding

graphical product page. For example, if

viewing the textual METAR page this softkey will be labeled METAR

MAP as shown here. If viewing the textual AIRMETs page this softkey

will be labeled AIRMET MAP and so on.

NOTE: If no location description is provided in the textual AIRMET the

AIRMET cannot be depicted graphically. These AIRMETs are denoted

by displaying the AIRMET identifier in green within the textual AIRMET.

Also, the AIRMET MAP Softkey will not be available.

CHANGE AREA Softkey - Pressing the

CHANGE AREA softkey will cycle

through the four options available for the

FILTER AREA field in the upper part of

the display. Available selections are

Destination, Nearest, FPL WPT and User Defined. The closest avail-

able weather reports for the selected FILTER AREA will be displayed in

the AVAILABLE reports field.

CHOOSE PRODUCT Softkey - Pressing

the CHOOSE PRODUCT softkey will dis-

play the SELECT WX PRODUCT

window. Use the Rotary Knob or Joystick

to highlight the desired weather product.

Rotary Knob/Joystick - These may be used to high-

light the desired weather product in the SELECT WX

PRODUCT window. The Rotary Knob may also be

used to scroll through flightplan waypoints and enter air-

port identifiers.

SELECT Softkey - After highlighting the

desired weather product in the SELECT

WX PRODUCT window, pressing the

SELECT Softkey will display the chosen

weather product.

RNG▲▲/RNG▼▼Keys - The KMD 250 displays all textual

weather product reports available within a specified radius

of the selection made in the FILTER AREA. This specified

radius can be changed by pressing the RNG▲▲/RNG▼▼

Keys.

Normal Operation

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-53

2-54

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

USING THE FIS TEXT

PAGE

Press the WX Function Select

Key until the FIS Textual Page

is displayed as shown in Figure

2-53.

NOTE: If a notification such as

that shown in Figure 2-54 is

displayed, it may be that the

system has not had time to

acquire a signal. If this notifi-

cation is still present after a few

minutes, refer to the FIS NOTI-

FICATIONS section of this sec-

tion.

If no METAR is available in the

selected area, a notification

such as that shown in Figure 2-

55 will be displayed.

The example displayed in

Figure 2-53 is a METAR report

for KIXD, which was selected

as a User Defined area.

Press the METAR MAP

Softkey to display the graphical

METAR for the KIXD as shown

in Figure 2-56. Press the

MORE INFO Softkey to return

the textual report.

The METAR MAP Softkey will

change depending on the

selected weather product. In

this case a METAR is being

viewed so the label displays

METAR MAP. If viewing an

AIRMET, the label would show

AIRMET MAP and so on. In

short, pressing this softkey will

display the graphical weather

product for the appropriate tex-

tual weather product selected.

NOTE: See Appendix B for a

list of common weather abbre-

viations.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-53

Figure 2-54

Figure 2-55

Figure 2-56

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-54

2-55

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

CHANGING WEATHER

PRODUCTS

1. Press the CHOOSE

PRODUCT Softkey to display

the SELECT WX PRODUCT

window as shown in Figure 2-

57.

2. Turn the Rotary Knob or

move the Joystick up or down

to highlight the desired weather

product.

3. Press the SELECT Softkey.

If a Graphical Weather Product

is selected, refer to that partic-

ular Graphical Weather

Products section for operation.

4. If desired, press the

RNG▲▲/RNG▼▼ Keys to change

the reporting radius for the

selected FILTER AREA. The

default distance for METARs is

50nm and TAFs is 100nm. All

others are 150nm. The user

selected distance can be from

50 to 300nm.

Note that in Figure 2-58,

METARs have been selected

with the default RNG of 50nm.

In this example all METAR

reports within 50nm of the User

Defined location of KJHW are

listed in the AVAILABLE

METARS field. The scroll bar

indicates not all reports are dis-

played. Move the Joystick to the right to select the different reports.

In Figure 2-59 the RNG▲▲Key has been used to change the report RNG

to 150nm. Note that more reports are now in the AVAILABLE METARS

field due to selecting the larger 150nm radius.

The AVAILABLE METARS field (or TAFS, PIREPS, etc.) lists closest

first, furthest last. For instance, the display shown in Figure 2-53 lists all

available METARs within 50nm of KJHW (the selected FILTER AREA).

Normal Operation

Figure 2-57

Figure 2-58

Figure 2-59

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-55

2-56

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

KJHW is also a reporting station which is listed first in the AVAILABLE

METARS field. Use the joystick to scroll through the AVAILABLE

METARS. Urgent, special or amended reports will be highlighted in

yellow.

Note that the displayed report in Figure 2-54 is 12 minutes old. The bar

indicates a percentage of time left before expiration. The bar will be

green the first 50%, then turn yellow.

CHANGING FILTER AREA

1. Press the CHANGE AREA Softkey to view either Nearest to present

position, a User Defined location, the Destination (last waypoint in a

flightplan) or FPLN WPT (any waypoint in an active flightplan). The

softkey cycles through the FILTER AREAs as shown in Figure 2-60.

These four selectable areas are used to make it easier to find all the

reports near a specific location without having to know the exact identifier

of the reporting station.

Scanning Flightplan

Waypoints

If FPLN WPT is selected in the

FILTER AREA field (as shown

in Figure 2-61), the Rotary

Knob can be used to sequence

through all the waypoints on

the active flightplan. The next

waypoint from the current posi-

tion will be displayed.

Turn the Rotary Knob clockwise

to sequence forward through the waypoints. Turn the Rotary Knob

counter-clockwise to sequence backward through the waypoints.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-61

Destination Flightplan

Waypoint Nearest

☞☞

☞

User

Defined

☞

Figure 2-60

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-56

2-57

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Finding User Defined Areas

by Identifier

If User Defined has been

selected, as in Figure 2-62, use

the following procedure to

change the location.

1. Turn the Rotary Knob to dis-

play the USER DEFINED

AREA ENTRY window as

shown in Figure 2-63. The

identifier previously selected is

displayed with the appropriate

name and city. Note the first

character in the IDENT field is

highlighted. Turn the Rotary

Knob to change this character.

2. Move the Joystick to the

right to highlight the next char-

acter as seen in Figure 2-64.

Again, turn the Rotary Knob to

change the character.

Continue changing each char-

acter in this manner until the

desired identifier is entered.

3. After entering the desired

the identifier, press the OK

Softkey. The selected weather

product will now be displayed

for the new User Defined area.

Finding User Defined Areas

by Name or City

When the identifier of the

desired location is known, the

method previously described

can be used to select it. However, if the identifier is not known, the name

of the location can be entered. The system will also allow entry of just

the first few characters of the location name to help find it in the data-

base. If neither the identifier nor the location name is known, the

city/state can be scanned.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-62

Figure 2-63

Figure 2-64

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-57

2-58

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

To Enter Location Name:

The following example shows

entering MONTROSE REGL

as a location.

1. Turn the Rotary Knob to dis-

play the USER DEFINED

AREA ENTRY window as

shown in Figure 2-63.

2. Move the Joystick down to

highlight the first character of

the location name as shown in

Figure 2-65.

3. Turn the Rotary Knob coun-

terclockwise until an Mis

selected as shown in Figure 2-

66.

4. Move the Joystick to the

right to highlight the next char-

acter as seen in Figure 2-67.

5. Turn Rotary Knob clockwise

until an Ois selected. Continue

moving the cursor and entering

characters until MONTROSE is

displayed.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-65

Figure 2-66

Figure 2-67

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-58

2-59

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

6. Press the KNOB SCAN

Softkey and Figure 2-68 will be

displayed.

7. Turn the Rotary Knob one

click clockwise. The first occur-

ance of names starting with

Montrose in the database is

now displayed as in Figure 2-

69.

8. Turn the Rotary Knob to

scan through the database until

the desired name is displayed

as in Figure 2-70.

9. Press the OK Softkey to

view the selected weather

product for MONTROSE

REGL.

To Enter Location by City:

A location may be selected by

first entering the city using the

same method as entering the

location name.

1. After entering the city, press

the KNOB SCAN Softkey.

2. Turning the Rotary Knob will

scan through the database dis-

playing each entry for the city

of Montrose.

3. Press the OK Softkey when

the desired location is dis-

played.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-68

Figure 2-69

Figure 2-70

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-59

2-60

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

To Scan for Location Name:

Sometimes, only a portion of

the airport name may come to

mind. The following example

shows scanning for EAGLE

GROVE MUN when EAGLE is

the only portion of the name

remembered.

1. If necessary press the

CHANGE AREA Softkey to

select User Defined in the

FILTER AREA.

2. Turn the Rotary Knob to dis-

play the USER DEFINED

AREA ENTRY window as

shown in Figure 2-71.

3. Move the Joystick down to

highlight the first the character

of the location name as shown

in Figure 2-72.

4. Turn the Rotary Knob coun-

terclockwise until an Eis

selected as shown in Figure 2-

73.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-71

Figure 2-72

Figure 2-73

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-60

2-61

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

5. Move the Joystick to the

right to highlight the next char-

acter space as seen in Figure

2-74.

6. Turn Rotary Knob clockwise

until an Ais selected as in

Figure 2-75. Continue moving

the cursor and entering charac-

ters until EAGLE is displayed.

7. Press the KNOB SCAN

Softkey and Figure 2-76 will be

displayed.

8. Turn the Rotary Knob to

sequence through all the loca-

tion names in the database

beginning with EAGLE. stop-

ping at the desired name as in

Figure 2-77.

9. Press the OK Softkey to

select EAGLE GROVE MUN

as the User Defined area.

NOTE: This same method

may be used with the name of

the city where the airport is

located.

This method is also used to

choose the desired airport

among those of identical

names, but located in different

cities.

Normal Operation

Figure 2-74

Figure 2-75

Figure 2-76

Figure 2-77

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-61

2-62

Section 2

FIS Operation

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Normal Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

Intentionally left blank

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-62

2-63 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

FIS NOTIFICATIONS

The following are descriptions of FIS notifications that may be displayed.

(GRAPHICAL PRODUCT) DATA HAS NOT BEEN

RECEIVED

If no valid graphical product

data is received (in this case

NEXRAD) a notification such

as that shown in Figure 2-78

will be displayed.

This notification usually means

that the system is not in FIS

VDL coverage or there is no

subscription set up for the

Value Added Product selected.

For XM WX, the notification

usually means that the XM WX

signal strength is poor.

The notification can also occur

while in coverage if not all of

the data for a weather product

has been received.

NO METARS AVAIL-

ABLE IN SELECTED

AREA

A notification such as that

shown in Figure 2-79 will be

displayed if no METARs are

available in the selected area.

This notification means that the

FIS system is working properly, there are simply no reports of the

selected mode within the area.

Figure 2-78

Figure 2-79

FIS Notifications

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-63

2-64

Section 2

FIS Operation

FIS Notifications

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

NO METARS AVAILABLE, DATA NOT RECEIVED

This notification will be dis-

played (Figure 2-80) if no

METAR data has been

received.

This notification means the FIS

system has not received any

METAR data. This may be

due to not being in FIS cov-

erage or to poor signal

strength.

INVALID SUBSCRIPTION CODE. PLEASE CHECK AND

RE-ENTER CODE (VDL ONLY)

This notification will be dis-

played (Figure 2-81) if an

invalid Subscription Code is

entered. This may be due to

an error entering the

Subscription Code. Also, it

may be due to a Subscription

Code being entered that is

associated with a different

Display ID.

Figure 2-81

Figure 2-80

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-64

2-65

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

UNDERSTANDING TEXTUAL AVIATION

WEATHER REPORTS

UNDERSTANDING METARS

Refer to the numbers on the following diagram to find the appropriate

descriptions.

1. Type of Report: METAR (SPECI will be seen here if this is a Special

Weather Report)

2. ICAO Station Identifier: KPIT

This is the location for which the METAR pertains.

3. Date and Time of Issue: 201955Z

The 20th day of the month at 1955Zulu or UTC.

4. AUTO indicates the reporting station is an automated station. If the

reporting station is a manned station this element will be omitted.

Also, if a report from an automated station is modified by a person

this element will be omitted. “COR” indicates a corrected report.

5. Wind: 22015G25KT

220 is the 3 digit true direction to the nearest 10°. Airport advisory

service, ATIS and ATC towers report wind direction as magnetic.

“VRB” in this place indicates variable winds less than or equal to 6

knots. If wind direction is varying more than 60° with speeds over 6

knots, an entry similar to “180V260” will be displayed in this place.

This example actually shows wind direction varying by 80°.

15 is the 2 or 3 digit wind speed (in knots).

25 is the 2 or 3 digit wind gust speed in knots (KT) because it follows a

G (Gust).

6. Visibility: 3/4SM R28R/2600FT

3/4 indicates 3/4 statute mile (SM) visibility.

Runway Visual Range (RVR) for R28R (runway 28 right) is 2600 feet

(2600FT). An “M” in this distance number indicates visibility is less

than the lowest reportable sensor value. A “P” indicates visibility is

greater than the highest reportable sensor value.

Understanding Weather Reports

METAR KPIT 201955Z AUTO 22015G25KT 3/4SM R28R/2600FT TSRA OVC010CB

18/16 A2992 RMK SLPO13 T01760158 PK WND 22030/15

13452678

910 11

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-65

2-66

Section 2

FIS Operation

Understanding Weather Reports

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

NOTE: Only reported at those locations with certified RVR reporting

capability.

7. Significant Present Weather: TSRA

TS is a two letter designation for thunderstorm. Other possible des-

ignations could be as follows:

BC Patches

BL Blowing

DR Low Drifting

FZ Supercooled/Freezing

MI Shallow

PR Partial

SH Showers

The second two letter designator, RA, indicates moderate rain.

Moderate is indicated by the absence of a “+”, “-” or “VC” preceding

the designation. These preceding designations represent the fol-

lowing:

+ Heavy

- Light

VC In the vicinity

Other possible designations could be as follows:

BR Mist

DS Dust Storm

DU Widespread Dust

DZ Drizzle

FC Funnel Cloud

+FC Tornado/Water Spout

FG Fog

FU Smoke

GR Hail

GS Small Hail/Snow Pellets

HZ Haze

IC Ice Crystals

PE Ice Pellets

PO Dust/Sand Whirls

PY Spray

SA Sand

SG Snow Grains

SN Snow

SQ Squall

SS Sandstorm

UP Unknown Precipitation (Automated Observations)

VA Volcanic Ash

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-66

2-67 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Apr/2006

8. Sky Condition: OVC010CB

OVC indicates the sky is overcast. Cloud cover is based on the sky

being divided into eighths or octas. Overcast means the sky is 8

octas covered. The cloud cover designators are as follows:

SKC Sky Clear

CLR Clear below 12,000 ft. (automated observing systems)

FEW 1-2 Octas

SCT 3-4 Octas

BKN 5-7 Octas

OVC 8 octas

“VV” may also be encountered here indicating an indefinite ceiling.

For example, VV004 would indicate a vertical visibility of 400 feet.

010 indicates clouds are at 1000 feet.

CB denotes cloud type is cumulonimbus. “TCU” is another possible

designator meaning towering cumulus. CI is cirrus.

9. Temperature/Dew Point: 18/16

18 indicated the temperature is 18° Celsius. An “M” preceding the

temperature means the temperature is below 0° Celsius.

16 indicated the dew point is 16° Celsius. An “M” preceding the dew

point means the dew point is below 0° Celsius.

10. Altimeter Setting: A2992

Aindicates the setting is in inches of mercury.

2992 is the altimeter setting. The first two digits are inches and the

second two are hundredths.

11. Remarks: RMK SLP013 T01760158 PK WND 22030/15

RMK designates the beginning of the remarks. Remarks can con-

tain anything, but often include the following:

SLP indicates sea level pressure in millibars from selected stations.

013 indicates pressure is 1001.3 millibars.

T01760158. Selected stations may also include a 9 place code indi-

cating temperature and dewpoint to the nearest 1/10 degree. T

denotes temperature. 0indicates temperature is above 0° Celsius.

A “1” in this position indicates a temperature below 0° Celsius. 176

indicates a temperature of 17.6° Celsius. The next 0indicates the

dew point is above 0° Celsius. A “1” in this position indicates a dew

point below 0° Celsius. 158 indicates a dewpoint of 15.8° Celsius.

PK WND 22030/15. Selected stations may include peak wind

observations which will appear in the remarks element.

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-67

2-68

Section 2

FIS Operation

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

PK WND denotes peak wind.

200 indicates wind direction from 200°.

30/15 indicates a maximum instantaneous wind of 30 knots occurred

at 15 minutes past the hour.

UNDERSTANDING TAFS

Refer to the numbers on the following diagram to find the appropriate

descriptions.

1. Type of Report: TAF

TAF indicates a Terminal Area Forecast. TAF AMD indicates an

amended forecast.

2. ICAO Station Identifier: KPIT

This is the airport for which the TAF pertains.

3. Date and Time of Issue: 091730Z

The 9th day of the month at 1730Zulu or UTC.

4. Date and Time Valid: 091818

The 9th day of the month, valid for 24 hours from 091800Z to

101800Z. An amended forecast (TAF AMD) will be valid for only the

time interval remaining, usually less than 24 hours.

5. Forecast Wind: 22020KT

See #5 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details.

6. Forecast Visibility: 3SM

See #6 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details,

except RVR is not included in a TAF

TAF KPIT 091730Z 091818 22020KT 3SM -SHRA BKN020

FM2030 30015G25KT 3SM SHRA OVC015 WS015/30045KT

TEMPO 2022 1/2SM TSRA OVC008CB

FM0100 27008KT 5SM -SHRA BKN020 OVC040 PROB40 0407

00000KT 1SM -RA BR

FM1000 22010KT 5SM -SHRA OVC020 BECMG 1315 20010KT

P6SM NSW SKC

2678

11 1514131216 17 18

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-68

2-69 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

7. Forecast Weather Phenomenon: -SHRA

See #7 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details.

8. Sky Conditions: BKN020

See #8 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details.

9. Beginning of Changed Forecast Conditions: FM1000

FM denotes “from” and 1000 indicates 1000Z. “From” means a sig-

nificant change in prevailing conditions is expected. The described

conditions follow this element and supercede all previous forecast

conditions.

10. Forecast Wind: 22010KT

See #5 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details.

11. Forecast Visibility: 5SM

See #6 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details.

12. Forecast Weather Phenomenon: -SHRA

See #7 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details.

13. Forecast Sky Conditions: OVC020

See #8 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details.

14. Change in Conditions: BECMG 1315

BECMG indicates “becoming” over the time interval between 1300Z

(13) and 1500Z (15). “Becoming” describes a gradual change in

forecast conditions. The described conditions follow this element

and supercede previously reported like elements.

15. Wind Becoming: 20010KT

See #5 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details. This

element may be omitted if no change is expected.

16. Visibility Becoming: P6SM

See #6 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details. This

element may be omitted if no change is expected.

17. Weather Phenomenon Becoming: NSW

NSW indicates “No Significant Weather”. See #7 in the UNDER-

STANDING METARs section for details.

18. Sky Conditions Becoming: SKC

See #8 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details. This

element may be omitted if no change is expected.

19. Change in Conditions: TEMPO 2022

TEMPO indicates “temporary” changes expected as described

between 2000Z (20)and 2200Z (22). “Temporary” indicates a tem-

porary fluctuation in conditions, usually lasting less than one hour.

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-69

2-70

Section 2

FIS Operation

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

The described conditions follow this element.

20. Low Level Windshear: WS015/30045KT

WS indicates “windshear” not associated with convective activity.

015 indicates the windshear is expected at 1500 feet. AGL Wind is

expected from 300° (300) at 45 knots (45KT).

21. Change in Conditions: PROB40 0407

PROB40 indicates a 40% “probability” of described conditions occur-

ring between 0400Z (04)and 0700Z (07). The described conditions

follow this element.

UNDERSTANDING PIREPS

The following is an example of a typical PIREP with an explanation of the

elements.

1. Station Identifier: KCRW

This is the station identifier of the nearest weather reporting location

to the reported conditions.

2. Report Type: UA

Reports will be routine (UA) or urgent (UUA).

3. Location: OV KBKW 360015-KCRW

OV indicates the report is in relation to a VOR. KBKW is the VOR

identifier, in this case Beckley VOR. 360015-KCRW indicates posi-

tion as related to the VOR. In this case, 15 miles out on the 360

degree radial. KCRW indicates this is a leg to the Charleston, West

Virginia VOR.

The next series of elements contain data that is read much like that in

METARs and TAFs. Each element starts with a 2-letter designator

which denotes the type of data with that element. The following defines

the element designators:

/TM: Time as Coordinated Universal Time

/FL: Altitude as Flight Level

/TP: Aircraft Type

/SK: Sky Cover (may include cloud height and coverage)

KCRW UA/OV KBKW 360015-KCRW/TM 1815/FL120/TP BE99/SK IMC/

WX RA/TA M08/WV 290030/TB LGT-MDT/IC LGT RIME/RM MDT MXD

ICG DURGC KROA NWBND FL080-100 1750Z

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-70

2-71 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

/WX: Weather Phenomenon (can include flight visibility, precipitation

and restrictions to visibility.

/TA: Outside air temperature at altitude in degrees Celsius.

/WV: Wind (direction in degrees magnetic north and speed in knots)

/TB: Turbulence (refer to the Airman’s Information Manual)

CAT - Clear Air Turbulence

CHOP - Choppy Turbulence

OCNL - Occasional

NEG - No Turbulence

ABV - Above

BLO - Below

LGT - Light - Momentarily causes slight, erratic changes in

altitude and/or attitude.

MOD - Moderate - Greater intensity changes in altitude and/or

attitude, but aircraft remains in positive control at all times.

Usually causes changes in indicated airspeed.

SEV - Severe - Causes large and abrupt changes to aircraft

altitude and/or attitude. Large variations in indicated airspeed

and momentary loss of control.

EXTRM - Extreme - Aircraft is violently tossed about and is

nearly impossible to control. May cause structural damage.

/IC: Icing (refer to the Airman’s Information Manual)

CLR - Clear

MX - Mixed (combination of rime and clear icing)

NEG - No Icing

ABV - Above

BLO - Below

Trace - Ice becomes perceptible. Rate of evaporation is

almost equal to the rate of accumulation. Deicing/anti-icing

equipment is not utilized unless encountered for a period of

time greater than 1 hour.

LGT - Light - Rate of accumulation may be a problem if flight

is prolonged for longer than 1 hour without deicing/anti-icing

equipment. Deicing/anti-icing removes and/or prevents accu-

mulation.

MOD - Moderate - The rate of accumulation is such that even

short encounters become potentially hazardous. Use of

deicing/anti-icing equipment or diversion is necessary.

SEV - Severe - Flight diversion is necessary. Deicing/anti-

icing equipment is not effective.

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-71

2-72

Section 2

FIS Operation

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

/RM: Remarks (for reporting elements not included or to clarify pre-

viously reported items). Remarks can include anything. The

example translates to “moderate (MDT) mixed (MXD) icing during

climb (DURGC) from Roanoke, VA (KROA) northwestbound

(NWBND) between Flight Level 080 and 100 (FL080100) at

1750Z”.

UNDERSTANDING AIRMETS

The following is an example of a typical AIRMET with an explanation of

the elements.

1. Forecast Area: CHIT

This is the forecast area identifier of the issuing Weather Service

Forecast Office.

BOS Boston

CHI Chicago

DFW Dallas/Ft. Worth

MIA Miami

SFO San Francisco

SLC Salt Lake City

The Tdenotes the reason for the AIRMET. This could be one of the

following:

SSierra IFR Ceilings < 1,000 feet and/or visibility

< 3 miles affecting > 50% of the area at

one time or extensive mountain obscu-

ration.

TTango Turbulence Moderate turbulence, sustained suface

winds of ≥ 30 knots at the surface or

low level windshear.

ZZulu Icing Moderate icing and/or freezing levels.

AIRMET items are considered widespread. Widespread is consid-

ered an area ≥ 3,000 square miles.

CHIT WA 151900 AMD

AIRMET TANGO UPDT 2 FOR TURB

VALID UNTIL 160100

AIRMET TURB...KS MO

FROM MCI TO STL TO SGF TO ICT TO MCI

MOD TURB BLW 100 EXPCD

CONDS IPVG AFT 160000Z

134

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-72

2-73 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

2. Report Type: WA

WA identifies an AIRMET.

3. Date and Time Issued: 151900

15 indicates the 15th day of the month. 1900 indicates UTC.

NOTE: AIRMETs may be issued up to 15 minutes prior to the start of the

validity period. The FIS system will display the data age as zero until the

start of the validity period.

4. AMD indicates an amended report. Reports can be amended due

to changing weather conditions or issuance/cancelation of a

SIGMET. COR in this field would indicate a corrected AIRMET.

RTD indicates a delayed AIRMET.

5. This line indicates that there is a second (2) update (UPDT) to this

AIRMET issued for turbulence (FOR TURB). More than one meteo-

rological condition may be addressed as shown in the following:

FOR IFR AND MTN (mountain) OBSCN (obscuration)

FOR ICE AND FRZLVL (freezing level)

FOR STG (strong) SFC (surface) WINDS AND LLWS (low

level wind shear)

6. This updated AIRMET is valid until 0100 UTC on the 16th day (16)

of the month. An AIRMET does not contain an explicit validity start

time.

7. This AIRMET forecasts turbulence (TURB) for the states of KS

(Kansas) and MO (Missouri). Geographic areas are also covered

such as CSTL WTRS (coastal waters). Other geographic abbrevia-

tions are used as well (see Appendix A).

8. The affected area is defined by lines FROM MCI (Kansas City) TO

STL (St. Louis) TO SGF (Springfield) TO ICT (Wichita) and back TO

MCI. Areas can be defined by lines between points which are air-

port or navaid identifiers.

9. Moderate (MOD) turbulence (TURB) below (BLW) 10,000 feet

expected (EXPCD).

10. Conditions (CONDS) improving (IPVG) after (AFT) the 16th day (16)

of the month 0000 UTC.

If conditions end more than one hour prior to the indicated expiration

time, an amended AIRMET will be issued stating it’s cancellation. If con-

ditions end within one hour of the indicated expiration time, the AIRMET

will be allowed to expire without cancellation. Once the report is can-

celled or expires, the FIS system no longer broadcasts the report.

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-73

2-74

Section 2

FIS Operation

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

UNDERSTANDING SIGMETS

The following is an example of a typical SIGMET issued for turbulence

with an explanation of the elements.

1. Forecast Area: CHIR

This is the forecast area identifier of the issuing Weather Service

Forecast Office.

BOS Boston

CHI Chicago

DFW Dallas/Ft. Worth

MIA Miami

SFO San Francisco

SLC Salt Lake City

The Rdenotes report ROMEO. A new alphabetic designator is

given each time a SIGMET is issued for a new weather phenom-

enon. The order of issuance is as follows:

NNOVEMBER

OOSCAR

PPAPA

QQUEBEC

RROMEO

UUNIFORM

VVICTOR

WWHISKEY

XXRAY

YYANKEE

SIGMETs are issued for:

Severe icing not associated with thunderstorms

Severe or extreme turbulence or clear air turbulence (CAT)

Dust storms or sandstorms lowering visibilities to < 3 miles

Volcanic ash

2. Report Type: UWS

CHIR UWS 041430

SIGMET ROMEO 1 VALID UNTIL 041830

KY TN WV VA OH

FROM CVG TO EKN TO PSK TO VXV TO CVG

OCNL SEV TURB BTN 300 AND 360. RPRTD BY AIRCRAFT.

CONDS CONTG BYD 1830Z.

SLM/GTB

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-74

2-75 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

UWS indicates this is the first issuance of report ROMEO.

Subsequent reports for ROMEO would display WS.

3. Date and Time Issued: 041430.

04 indicates the 4th day of the month. 1430 indicates UTC.

4. This line indicates that SIGMET ROMEO 1 is VALID UNTIL the 4th

day (04) of the month at 1830 UTC.

Each subsequent report issued for this same weather phenomenon

designated ROMEO would increment the number. For example,

ROMEO 2, ROMEO 3 and so on.

5. Area of coverage by state or geographic area. In addition to state

abbreviations, other area abbreviations may be seen here, such as,

TX CSTL WTRS (Texas Coastal Waters).

6. Location of weather phenomenon. Three letter designators for

navaids or airports are used to describe boundaries of coverage. If

the weather phenomenon extends across multiple forecast areas,

the location is described as if no boundaries exist.

7. Details of weather phenomenon. The example is typical of a syn-

opsis for turbulence:

OCNL (occasional) SEV (severe) TURB (turbulence) BTN

(between) 300 (30,000 feet) AND 360 (36,000 feet). RPRTD

(reported) BY AIRCRAFT. CONDS (conditions) CONTG (contin-

uing) BYD (beyond 1830Z.

More typical examples of descriptors used in other SIGMET weather

phenomenon are as follows:

MOD (moderate) TO

STG (strong) UDDFS (updrafts and downdrafts)

UPDFTS (updrafts)

DWNDFTS (downdrafts)

INVOF (in vicinity of) MTNS (mountains)

BLO (below) 360

BTWN (between) FRZLVL (freezing level) AND 360

ABV (above) 360

RPRTD (reported) BY ACFT (aircraft) IN VCNTY (vicinity)

RPRTD BY SVRL (several) ACFT

8. Issuers initials.

If conditions end more than one half hour prior to the indicated expiration

time, and the report does not state that conditions will continue, a cancel-

lation will be issued with CNCL SIGMET as the report designator. If con-

ditions are expected to continue, a new SIGMET will be issued. If condi-

tions end within one half hour of the indicated expiration time, the

SIGMET will be allowed to expire without cancellation. Once the report

is cancelled or expires, the FIS system no longer broadcasts the report.

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-75

2-76

Section 2

FIS Operation

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

UNDERSTANDING CONVECTIVE SIGMETS

The following is an example of a typical Convective SIGMET with an

explanation of the elements.

1. Station Identifier: MKCC

MKC is the station identifier of the Aviation Weather Center (AWC)

in Kansas City.

The Cdenotes the report is for the Central portion of the continental

United States. The choices are as follows:

CCentral

EEast

WWest

Convective SIGMETs are issued for:

Severe weather including: (a)Surface winds ≥ 50 knots,

(b) Surface hail ≥ 3/4 inch in diameter or (c) Tornadoes

Embedded thunderstorms (obscured by haze or other phenomena)

Line of thunderstorms

Thunderstorms ≥ VIP level 4 affecting ≥ 40% of an area ≥ 3000 sq.

mi.

2. Report Type: WST

WST indicates this is a convective SIGMET.

3. Date and Time Issued: 221855.

22 indicates the 22nd day of the month. 1855 indicates UTC.

4. This line is the identifying number of the Convective SIGMET.

Numbering begins daily at 0000 UTC. The Cdenotes the Central

portion of the country.

MKCC WST 221855

CONVECTIVE SIGMET 20C

VALID UNTIL 2055Z

ND SD

FROM 60W MOT-GFK-ABR-90W MOT

INTSFYG AREA SVR TSTMS MOVG FROM 2445. TOPS ABV FL450.

WIND GUSTS TO 60KT RPRTD. TORNADOES…HAIL TO 2 IN…WIND

GUSTS TO 65KT PSBL ND PTN.

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-76

2-77 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

5. This line indicates that CONVECTIVE SIGMET 20C is VALID

UNTIL 2055Z time. Expiration time is two hours after issuance, but

Convective SIGMETs are issued hourly and replace the previous

hour’s product.

Each subsequent report issued for this same weather phenomenon

would increment the number. For example, 21C, 22C and so on.

6. Area of coverage by state ND (North Dakota) and SD (South

Dakota) or geographic area. In addition to state abbreviations, other

area abbreviations may be seen here, such as FL CSTL WTRS

(Florida Coastal Waters).

7. Location of weather phenomenon (may be an area, single cell or

line). Three letter designators for navaids or airports are used to

describe boundaries of coverage.

The starting and ending point are identical for an area of thunder-

storms, like this: FROM 90W MOT-GFK-ABR-90W MOT (from 90

nm west of Minot, ND to Grand Forks, ND to Aberdeen, SD to 90

nm west of Minot, ND).

A Single Cell thunderstorm 35 nm west of Kansas City would look

like this: 35WMKC

A Line of severe thunderstorms would look like this: FROM 90SE

SGF-70NE TXK-50NE LFK (from 90 nm southeast of Springfield,

MO to 70 nm northeast of Texarkana, AR to 50 nm northeast of

Lufkin, TX).

8. Details of weather phenomenon. Convective SIGMET details are

mostly in plain language with some abbreviations. This example is

typical for an area of severe thunderstorms:

INTSFYG (intensifying) AREA (of) SVR TSTMS (severe thunder-

storms) MOVG (moving) FROM 2445 (240 degrees at 45 knots).

Storm TOPS ABV (above) FL450 (flight level 4-5-0). WIND GUSTS

TO 60KT (knots) RPRTD (reported). TORNADOES…HAIL TO 2 IN

(inches in diameter)…WIND GUSTS TO 65 KT (knots) PSBL (pos-

sible) in the ND PTN (North Dakota portion).

For a single cell thunderstorm:

ISOLD (isolated) SVR TSTM (severe thunderstorm) D30 (30 nm in

diameter) MOVG (moving) FROM 2520 (250 degrees at 20 knots).

Storm TOPS ABV (above) FL450 (flight level 4-5-0). HAIL TO 2 IN

(inches in diameter) WIND GUSTS TO 65 KT (knots) PSBL (pos-

sible).

For a line of thunderstorms 25 nm wide:

LINE (line of) SVR TSTMS (severe thunderstorms) 25 MI WIDE

MOVG (moving) FROM 2745 (270 degrees at 45 knots). Storm

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-77

2-78

Section 2

FIS Operation

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 4 Aug/2007

TOPS ABV (above) FL450 (flight level 4-5-0). WIND GUSTS TO

60KT (knots) RPRTD (reported). TORNADOES…HAIL TO 2 IN

(inches in diameter)…WIND GUSTS TO 65 KT (knots) PSBL (pos-

sible).

UNDERSTANDING ALERT WEATHER WATCHES (AWW)

The following is an example of a typical Alert Weather Watch with an

explanation of the elements.

1. Station Identifier: SPC

SPC is the station identifier for the Storm Prediction Center in

Norman, Oklahoma.

AWWs are issued for:

Tornado

Damaging winds or winds > 58 knots

Hail ≥ 3/4 inch in diameter.

2. Report Type: AWW

AWW indicates this is an Alert Weather Watch.

3. Date and Time Issued: 162236.

16 indicates the 16th day of the month. 2236 indicates UTC.

4. WW 1162 is the identifying number of the Alert Weather Watch.

Numbering begins yearly at 0000.

5. This line indicates the type of weather and the affected areas.

SEVERE TSTM (severe thunderstorm) for MS (Mississippi) AL

(Alabama) FL (Florida) AND ADJ CSTL WTRS (adjacent coastal

waters).

6. This line indicates that the watch is valid from 162300Z - 170400Z

SPC AWW 162236

WW 1162 SEVERE TSTM MS AL FL AND ADJ CSTL WTRS

162300Z - 170400Z

AXIS..75 STATUTE MILES NORTH AND SOUTH OF LINE..

45SW MOB/MOBILE AL/ - 30SSE DHN/DOTHAN AL/

..AVIATION COORDS.. 65NM N/S /37SW MOB - 51WNW TLH/

HAIL SURFACE AND ALOFT..1 1/4 INCHES. WIND GUSTS..60

KNOTS. MAX TOPS TO 400. MEAN WIND VECTOR 23035.

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-78

2-79 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007

(the 16th at 2300 Zulu to the 17th at 0400 Zulu).

7. Coordinates of the watch box area. Draw a line 75 STATUTE

MILES NORTH AND SOUTH OF A LINE.. The endpoints of the line

are 45SSW MOB/MOBILE AL/-30SSE DHN/DOTHAN AL/ (45

miles south-southwest of Mobile, Alabama and 30 miles south-

southeast of Dothan, Alabama). Connect the lines to form the box.

Sometimes it might be defined as EAST AND WEST OF A LINE.. or

EITHER SIDE OF A LINE..

8. Aviation coordinates of the watch box area. Draw a line 65NM N/S /

(65 nautical miles north and south) of a line). The endpoints of the

line are 37SW MOB - 51WNW TLH/ (37 nautical miles southwest of

Mobile, Alabama and 51 nautical miles west-northwest of

Tallahassee, Florida). Connect the lines to form the box.

9. Details of the forecast weather. AWW details are mostly in plain lan-

guage with some abbreviations. This is an example of a typical

product.

HAIL SURFACE AND ALOFT..1 1/4 INCHES (hail diameter poten-

tial of one and one quarter inches) WIND GUSTS..60 KNOTS (wind

gust potential of 60 knots) MAX TOPS TO 400 (maximum tops of

the storms is 40,000 feet). MEAN WIND VECTOR 23035 (motion of

storm is 230 degrees at 35 knots).

Understanding Weather Reports

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-79

2-80

Section 2

FIS Operation

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Understanding Weather Reports

Intentionally left blank

KMD 250 FIS_R4 8/13/07 10:07 AM Page 2-80

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

3-1

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

SECTION 3

TRAFFIC AVOIDANCE OPERATION

INTRODUCTION

The Traffic Function of the Bendix/King KMD 250 Multi Function Display

allows for the display and control of one of several models of traffic

avoidance systems. Some examples are TCAS I (Traffic Collision

Avoidance System), TCAS II, TAS (Traffic Avoidance System) and TIS

(Traffic Information Service).

This section describes the operation of the KMD 250 display for control-

ling the display of traffic. For detailed information on the proper use and

interpretation of the displayed traffic data when using TCAS I, TCAS II

and TAS systems, please reference the pilot’s guide that is provided

with the traffic avoidance system.

An active traffic avoidance system (TCAS I, TCAS II or TAS) is used for

detecting and tracking aircraft near your own aircraft. Aircraft detected,

tracked, and displayed are referred to as Intruders. Intruders are shown

as symbols on the traffic display. The system identifies the relative

threat of each Intruder by using various symbols and colors. The

intruder’s altitude, relative to your own aircraft’s altitude, is annunciated if

the Intruder is reporting altitude. A trend arrow is used to indicate if the

Intruder is climbing or descending more than 500 feet per minute.

The passive Traffic Information Service (TIS) is a data link service that

provides information similar to VFR radar traffic advisories normally

received over voice radio. The data is received from the terminal Mode

S radar system through a TIS capable Mode S transponder to the KMD

display once per radar scan (approximately every 5 seconds).

TIS provides the relative position, relative altitude, altitude trend, and

estimated ground track angle for as many as 8 intruders that are within 7

NM horizontally and +3,500/-3000 feet vertically of the aircraft receiving

TIS. Only aircraft with operating transponders that are within the surveil-

lance volume of a TIS Mode S radar are visible to TIS. Terminal Mode

S radars equipped with TIS provide the service to 55 NM (or possibly

greater) of the radar location, and as low as the "line of site" limitation

inherent to radar surveillance.

ATC procedures and the “see and avoid concept” will continue to be the

primary means of ensuring aircraft separation. However, if communica-

tion is lost with ATC, TCAS/TAS/TIS adds a significant backup for colli-

sion avoidance.

Introduction

3-2

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

The Bendix/King KMD 250 is shown below with the Traffic Page for

TAS/TCAS selected.

The Bendix/King KMD 250 is shown below with the Traffic Page for TIS

selected.

TRAFFIC FUNCTION STATUS ICONS

The Traffic Function Status Icons are located in the lower left of the dis-

play. They are used to indicate whether or not the KMD 250 is currently

receiving and/or displaying traffic information. The following table shows

the various traffic icons and their meanings:

Introduction

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

3-3

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

TAS/TCAS

This section applies to TAS, TCAS I and TCAS II systems.

TAS/TCAS NORMAL OPERATION

To display the TCAS/TAS traffic page press the TRFC

function select key.

The following illustration defines the data that appears on the TAS/TCAS

Traffic Display Page:

1 Display Range - RNG:####.

2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and

displayed.

3 Current Flight Level - FL ###

4 Altitude Volume - Current Altitude Volume selection is displayed in this field.

5 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is always

2 nm.

6 Active Flight Plan

7 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position.

8 Altitude Volume Softkey - When the ALTITUDE VOLUME softkey is pressed,

the display will step through NORMAL, ABOVE, BELOW and UNRESTRICTED.

9 Flight Level Softkey - Pressing FLIGHT LEVEL toggles the Flight Level

display on or off.

10 Traffic Intruder Symbols - Indicates type of traffic, altitude of traffic, vertical

trend of traffic and ground track of traffic.

11 Pop-Up Softkey - Pressing the MENU Key will display the pop-up softkey.

Pressing this softkey will toggle between DISABLE POP-UP and ENABLE

POP-UP. When enabled, the Traffic Page will be displayed whenever there

is a traffic alert.

12 System ON/SBY/TST - Rotary Knob selects system ON,SBY (standby) or

TST (test).

13 Page Display Name

14 System Operating Mode - If using a TAS system, TAS TST, TAS SBY, TA

ONLY or TAS FAIL will be displayed. If using a TCAS system, TCAS TST,

TCAS SBY, TA ONLY, TA/RA, or TCAS FAIL will be displayed.

6 7

TAS/TCAS

3-4

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

OPERATIONAL CONTROLS FOR TAS/TCAS

ALTITUDE VOLUME - Toggles between

altitude volume views of NORMAL,

ABOVE, BELOW or UNRESTRICTED.

This key may be enabled or disabled in

system configuration.

FLIGHT LEVEL - Pressing the MENU Key will display the

FLIGHT LEVEL Softkey. Pressing this key toggles the alti-

tude tag between relative or absolute alti-

tude as shown in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.

When absolute altitude is displayed, the

Flight Level will also be displayed in the

upper left of the screen. Operation in the

absolute mode is limited to 15 seconds.

This feature may be enabled or disabled in system configuration. See

note below.

NOTE: If

FLIGHT LEVEL

ALTITUDE VOLUME

Soft Keys or the

Rotary Knob are not active, these controls will be found on the separate

TAS/TCAS controller.

AUTO-POP-UP - Toggles between ENABLE POP-UP and

DISABLE POP-UP. When enabled the Traffic Display will

automatically be displayed in a Traffic Alert

situation. In some situations, like high

traffic areas or flying in formation, this fre-

quent display changing could be a nui-

sance. Disabling the pop-up may desir-

able in these circumstances. This key may be enabled or disabled in

system configuration.

RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼- Advances the indicator to the next range.

The upper button increases range, the lower button

decreases it. The selected range is displayed in the lower

left corner of the display with the inner range ring always 2

nm. The RNG button labels will not be displayed when

their respective range limits are reached.

Rotary Knob - Selects between Test

(TST), Standby (SBY) and On mode of

operation. This control may be enabled or

disabled in system configuration. If the

KMD 250 is used with a TCAS II or L-3

SkywatchTM system, this control will not be

available.

TAS/TCAS

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

3-5

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

TAS/TCAS SYMBOLOGY

NON-THREAT TRAFFIC

An open white diamond indicates that an intruder is not yet

considered a threat. For specifics on relative distance and

altitude that defines this symbol, please refer to the pilot’s

guide that is provided with the traffic avoidance system. This one is 200

feet above your own altitude, climbing at 500 feet per minute or greater.

PROXIMITY INTRUDER TRAFFIC

A filled white diamond indicates that the intruding aircraft has

reached the next proximity threshold defined by the traffic

avoidance system, but is still not considered a threat. For

specifics on relative distance and altitude that defines this symbol,

please refer to the pilot’s guide that is provided with the traffic avoidance

system.This intruder is now 400 feet below your aircraft and climbing at

500 feet per minute or greater.

TRAFFIC ADVISORY (TA)

A symbol change to a filled yellow circle indicates that the

intruding aircraft is considered to be potentially hazardous.

Depending on your own altitude the system will display a TA

when time to Closest Point of Approach (CPA) is reached as defined by

traffic avoidance system. For specifics on CPA as defined by the

system, please refer to the pilot’s guide that is provided with the traffic

avoidance system. Here the intruder is 100 feet above your aircraft,

descending at 500 feet per minute or greater.

RESOLUTION ADVISORY (RA)

This symbol will only be displayed when the KMD 250 is inter-

faced with a TCAS II system. A solid red square indicates that

the intruding aircraft is projected to be a collision threat. TCAS

Figure 3-1

Relative Altitude Mode

Figure 3-2

Absolute Altitude Mode

TAS/TCAS

3-6

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

II calculates that the intruder has reached a point where a Resolution

Advisory is necessary. The time to CPA with the intruder, depending on

your altitude, has been reached as defined by the traffic avoidance

system. For specifics on CPA as defined by the system, please refer to

the pilot’s guide that is provided with the traffic avoidance system. The

symbol appears together with an appropriate audio warning and a

vertical maneuver indication on the RA/VSI. This aircraft is now 100 feet

below your altitude and still descending at 500 feet per minute or

greater.

NOTE: An intruder must be reporting altitude in order to generate an RA.

Therefore, the RA symbol will always have an altitude tag.

“OFF-SCALE” TRAFFIC

TA or RA traffic that is beyond the selected range will be displayed as

half the appropriate symbol at the edge of the display matching the

bearing of the traffic.

“NO-BEARING”

TRAFFIC

If the bearing of TA or RA

traffic cannot be determined by

the traffic avoidance system,

no traffic symbol will be dis-

played on the TRFC display.

The traffic information will

instead be displayed in the

lower center of the display as

shown in Figure 3-3. A max-

imum of two “no-bearing” TA

and/or RA intruders can be displayed. If the intruder is not reporting alti-

tude, the altitude and trend arrow fields will be blank.

NOTE: “Off-Scale” and “No-

Bearing” advisories are dis-

played only on the TRFC

Page.

TA/RA WHILE IN MAP

OR WEATHER DISPLAY

If a Traffic Advisory presents

itself while in the Map or

Weather Display the traffic

function icon in the Functions

Legend will flash yellow along

with ALERT as represented in Figure 3-4. In the case of a Resolution

Advisory in a TCAS II system, the icon will flash red.

TAS/TCAS

Figure 3-3

Figure 3-4

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

3-7

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

AUTO-POP-UP

If AUTO-POP-UP is enabled,

a TA or RA will cause the

Traffic Display to be presented

automatically. The default

range of the pop-up display

will be 7 nm.

To enable AUTO-POP-UP

perform the following:

1. While viewing the Traffic

Display, press the MENU Key

to display the ENABLE POP-

UP Softkey as shown in Figure

3-5. This Softkey toggles

between ENABLE and DIS-

ABLE POP-UP.

VIEWING TRAFFIC IN A

DATA FIELD

Traffic may be selected for

viewing in a Data Field as

shown in Figure 3-6 (also see

Section 1 for displaying Data

Fields). Altitude tags and ver-

tical trend arrows will not be

shown with traffic symbol in the

Data Field display.

Traffic will not be available in

the Data Field if the Map

Orientation is set to North Up.

If the Map Display is in North

Up mode, the Traffic Data Field

will appear as shown in Figure

3-7.

TAS/TCAS

Figure 3-5

Figure 3-6

Figure 3-7

3-8

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

TAS/TCAS SYSTEM FAULTS

NO DATA RECEIVED

If the KMD 250 is not receiving

any data from the TCAS or

TAS sensor then a screen sim-

ilar to Figure 3-8 will be dis-

played. This could indicate that

power is not being provided to

the traffic avoidance system

(e.g. a pulled breaker), a bad

wiring connection between the

display and the sensor, or a

failed TCAS or TAS unit.

SYSTEM TEST

A system test can be performed to verify

the traffic avoidance system is working

properly. If the KMD 250 is configured to

use the Rotary Knob with the traffic func-

tion, turn the outer knob to

select TST. Figure 3-9 indi-

cates a properly functioning

TCAS I/TAS system. An RA

will be displayed for a TCAS II

system. If the KMD 250 not

configured for use of the

Rotary Knob with the traffic

function, this test would be per-

formed using the appropriate

control unit.

If faults are detected in the

KMD 250 or the traffic sensor

they will be displayed as

shown in Figure 3-10. This

figure shows all faults. Only

actual faults will be displayed.

TAS/TCAS

Figure 3-8

Figure 3-9

Figure 3-10

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

3-9

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

Traffic Information Service

TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)

This section applies only to TIS systems.

TIS is an alerting system that provides visibility to nearby traffic

enhancing “see and avoid” collision avoidance. It’s purpose is to

increase situational awareness by supplying information to assist in visu-

ally acquiring nearby aircraft. TIS does not relieve the pilot of “see and

avoid” responsibility. No avoidance maneuvers are provided or recom-

mended by TIS.

The service is offered through the Federal Aviation Administration’s

Mode S terminal sensors and uses the same surveillance information

provided to ATC. Estimated bearing, distance, altitude and heading

information for aircraft within 7 NM and +3,500/-3,000 feet altitude of

your aircraft is sent over the Mode S datalink to the TIS display. The

pilot is also alerted to aircraft that are predicted to be within 30 seconds

of a potential collision, no matter the distance or altitude.

Target aircraft are displayed only if operating a Mode A, C or S

transponder. TIS operation is transparent to ATC and requires no con-

troller intervention.

When the onboard TIS system makes a request for TIS, the request is

sent via the Mode S transponder through the datalink. The first available

Mode S sensor capable of supporting TIS for your aircraft responds by

sending data back through the datalink on every scan of the sensor

(approximately every 5 seconds). TIS will be provided by the sensor as

long as the aircraft is within coverage range of that sensor. When

entering the coverage range of another sensor, TIS will continue pro-

vided the next sensor is TIS capable. The transfer of service is auto-

matic. In addition to traffic data, the aircraft receives status messages

that advise the pilot when TIS service has been initiated, is continuing, or

has been terminated.

While coverage varies with terrain and local site parameters, “line-of-

sight” coverage is to be expected within 55 NM of a TIS capable Mode S

sensor. Terrain and obstacles can cause areas of no radar coverage.

KMD 250 w/ TIS Display

KT 73 Mode S

Mode S

Sensor

TIS

ALGORITHMS

3-10

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

TIS LIMITATIONS

Traffic may not be displayed for one or more of the following reasons:

1. Radar site is out of service. If a TIS capable Mode S sensor is not in

service for any reason, TIS is not available. See Figure 3-11.

2. Your aircraft is beyond maximum range of a TIS capable Mode S

site. Maximum range can extend beyond 55 NM up to 100 NM.

However, expect TIS service to 55 NM. See Figure 3-11 and 3-12.

3. Your aircraft is inside the “Cone of Silence. When near or above

(depending on altitude) the TIS radar site, and out of range of another

TIS radar site, TIS data cannot be received. See Figure 3-13.

Traffic Information Service

Figure 3-11 - TIS Capable Mode S Radar Sensor Sites

Figure 3-12 - TIS Functional Range

TIS Range

~55 nm

Radar Range

Varies

Radar Coverage

Dead Zones

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

3-11

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

4. The other aircraft is within the “Cone of Silence”. So, remember,

there may be aircraft within your alert area, but if they are not seen by

the radar site they will not show on your display.

5. Your aircraft is below radar coverage. With no obstructions and flat

terrain, the coverage floor is about 2,000-3,000 feet at 60 miles and

4,000-6,000 feet at 100 miles. Terrain and obstacles can substantially

decrease coverage range or make coverage asymmetrical about the

radar site. See Figure 3-13.

6. The other traffic is below radar coverage. The other aircraft may be

in situations mentioned in number 5 and therefore not seen by radar.

Again, there may be aircraft within your alert area, but if they are not

seen by the radar site they will not show on your display.

7. The other aircraft is without an operating a Mode A, C or S

transponder.

8. Bearing error increases as the distance from the radar site

increases. However, distance and relative altitude will remain accurate.

9. Due to the way the radar sites check for transponder faults, a reply

can be interpreted as two different aircraft. This causes a “self alert”.

This is shown as a “pop-up” alert intruder at or near the client’s position

and altitude lasting for only one or two radar scans. It most often occurs

during maneuvering or upon entry into TIS coverage.

NOTE: It is important to understand that no display or aural warning of

traffic information shows the location of all traffic in the vicinity.

Whenever in VMC conditions, continue to visually scan for traffic.

NOTE: Pilots should report TIS outages to Flight Service which will

report them to the Airway Facilities Operations Control Centers for reso-

lution, similar to a report of any other system outage.

Traffic Information Service

Mode-S Terminal Secondary Surveillance Radar

Radar Coverage

Dead Zones

“Cone of Silence”

Figure 3-13 - Obstructions To TIS Coverage

3-12

Rev 3 Dec/2005 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

Traffic Information Service

TIS NORMAL OPERATION

NOTE: TIS availability may be intermittent during turns or other maneu-

vering where the aircraft structure can block the line of sight between the

Mode S radar and the Mode S transponder antenna.

To display the TIS traffic page press the TRFC Function

Select Key.

The following illustration defines the data that appears on the TIS Traffic

Display Page:

1 Display Range - RNG:####.

2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and displayed.

3 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is always

2 nm.

4 Current Flight Level - FL:###

5 Audio Muting - When audio muting is turned on by pressing the ENABLE MUT

Softkey, TIS Mute ON will be displayed in this field.

6 Heading - Current aircraft magnetic heading (HDG) or ground track (TRK). If no

heading or track information is available, the the field displays NO HDG/TRK.

7 Active Flight Plan

8 Traffic Intruder Symbols - Indicates type of traffic, altitude of traffic, vertical trend

of traffic and ground track of traffic.

9 Flight Level Softkey - Pressing FLIGHT LEVEL toggles the Flight Level display

on or off.

10 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position.

11 Audio Mute Softkey - Pressing the MENU Key will display the muting softkey.

Pressing this softkey will toggle between DISABLE MUTE and ENABLE MUTE.

12 Pop-Up Softkey - Pressing the MENU Key will display the pop-up softkey. Pressing

this softkey will toggle between DISABLE POP-UP and ENABLE POP-UP. When

enabled, the Traffic Page will be displayed whenever there is a traffic alert.

13 System ON/OFF - Rotary Knob selects TIS ON or OFF.

14 Page Display Name

15 TIS Operating Mode - Displays TIS ON, TIS OFF or TIS FAIL.

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

3-13

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

Traffic Information Service

TIS OPERATIONAL CONTROLS

FLIGHT LEVEL - Pressing the MENU Key will display the

FLIGHT LEVEL Softkey. Pressing this key toggles the alti-

tude tag between relative or absolute alti-

tude as shown in Figures 3-14 and 3-15.

When absolute altitude is displayed, the

Flight Level will also be displayed in the

upper left of the screen. Operation in the

absolute mode is limited to 15 seconds.

AUDIO MUTE - The “TIS Unavailable” audio notification

may be muted by pressing the ENABLE MUTE Softkey.

When enabled TIS Mute ON will be dis-

played in the upper left of the screen. The

DISABLE MUTE Softkey will then be

available to disable the audio muting. The

audio traffic alerts are not affected.

AUTO-POP-UP - Toggles between ENABLE POP-UP and

DISABLE POP-UP. When enabled the Traffic Display will

automatically be displayed in a Traffic

Alert situation. In some situations, like

high traffic areas or flying in formation, this

frequent display changing could be a nui-

sance. Disabling the pop-up may desir-

able in these circumstances. This key

may be enabled or disabled in system configuration.

RNG▲▲//RNG▼▼- Advances the indicator to the next range.

The upper button increases range, the lower button

decreases it. The selected range is displayed in the lower

left corner of the display with the inner range ring always 2

nm. The RNG button labels will not be displayed when

their respective range limits are reached.

Rotary Knob - Turns the TIS system On

or OFF.

Figure 3-14

Relative Altitude Mode

Figure 3-15

Absolute Altitude Mode

3-14

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

TIS SYMBOLOGY

TIS symbols have a track pointer which are not on TCAS/TAS symbols.

The track pointer shows the estimated ground track direction the traffic is

moving (in 45° increments) relative to your own aircraft.

PROXIMITY INTRUDER TRAFFIC

A filled white diamond indicates that the intruding aircraft has

reached the proximity traffic threshold as defined by the TIS

system, but is still not considered a threat. This intruder is

now 100 feet below your aircraft and flying level. The track

pointer on the diamond indicates the direction of the intruder’s

ground track. Here the intruder is moving approximately 45° to your cur-

rent track or heading.

PROXIMITY INTRUDER NON-ALTITUDE REPORTING

(NAR)TRAFFIC

An open white diamond indicates proximity traffic that is non-

altitude reporting. The symbol indicates that the intruder’s

ground track is approximately 90° to your current track or

heading.

TRAFFIC ADVISORY (TA)

A symbol change to a filled yellow circle indicates that the

intruding aircraft is considered to be potentially hazardous.

Depending on your own altitude the system will display a TA

when time to Closest Point of Approach (CPA) is reached as

defined by the TIS system. Here the intruder is 100 feet

above your aircraft. The arrow indicates the intruder is descending at

500 feet per minute or greater. The intruder is moving at approximately

180° to your current track or heading

TRAFFIC ADVISORY NON-ALTITUDE REPORTING (NAR)

An open yellow circle indicates that the intruding aircraft is

considered to be potentially hazardous and is not reporting

altitude. Here the intruder is moving at approximately 225° to

your current track or heading.

“OFF-SCALE” TRAFFIC

TA traffic that is beyond the selected range will be displayed as half the

appropriate symbol at the edge of the display matching the bearing of

the traffic.

Traffic Information Service

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

3-15

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

TRAFFIC ADVISORY

WHILE IN MAP DISPLAY

If a Traffic Advisory presents

itself while in the Map or

Weather Display the traffic

function icon in the Functions

Legend will flash yellow along

with ALERT as represented in

Figure 3-16.

AUTO-POP-UP

If AUTO-POP-UP is enabled, a

TA will cause the Traffic

Display to be presented auto-

matically. The default range of

the pop-up display will be 7 nm.

To enable AUTO-POP-UP per-

form the following:

1. While viewing the Traffic

Display, press the MENU Key

to display the ENABLE POP-

UP Softkey as shown in Figure

3-17. This Softkey toggles

between ENABLE and DIS-

ABLE POP-UP.

VIEWING TRAFFIC IN A

DATA FIELD

Traffic may be selected for

viewing in a Data Field as

shown in Figure 3-18 (also see

Section 1 for displaying Data

Fields). Altitude tags, vertical

trend arrows and ground track

pointers will not be shown with

traffic symbol in the Data Field

display.

Traffic Information Service

Figure 3-16

Figure 3-17

Figure 3-18

3-16

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

Traffic will not be available in

the Data Field if the Map

Orientation is set to North Up.

It the Map Display is in North

Up mode, the Traffic Data Field

will appear as shown in Figure

3-19.

COAST MODE

When intruders are displayed

and TIS information is not

received from the terminal

Mode S radar for one radar

scan, the altitude tag of the

intruder is replaced with the

text CST to inform the pilot that

the system is in Coast mode.

See Figure 3-20. CST will also

be displayed in the Traffic Data

Window. This means the dis-

played intruder information is

old and could have changed

since the last update.

When two radar scans have

elapsed without TIS informa-

tion, the intruders are removed

from the display and TIS

UNAVAILABLE is displayed in

the center of the Traffic Display

(Figure 3-21) or UNAVAIL will

be displayed in the Traffic Data

Window. Also, an audible "TIS

UNAVAILABLE" notification will

be heard (if not muted). The

display will revert to normal

when TIS information is again

available.

Traffic Information Service

Figure 3-19

Figure 3-20

Figure 3-21

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

3-17

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

TIS SYSTEM FAULTS

SYSTEM OFF

If the TIS system is set to the

OFF position, Figure 3-22 will

be displayed.

NO DATA RECEIVED

If the KMD 250 is not receiving

data from the TIS receiver then

Figure 3-23 will be displayed.

This could indicate that power

is not being provided to the TIS

receiver (e.g. a pulled breaker),

the TIS receiver is turned off, a

bad wiring connection between

the display and the receiver, or

a failed TIS receiver.

TRANSPONDER NOT

REPORTING ALTITUDE

If the transponder’s altitude

source has failed or the

transponder is put into a non-

altitude reporting mode, Figure

3-24 will be displayed.

Traffic Information Service

Figure 3-22

Figure 3-23

Figure 3-24

3-18

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Section 3

Traffic Avoidance

Traffic Information Service

Intentionally left blank

4-1

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 4

Stormscope®

SECTION 4

WX-500 STORMSCOPE®OPERATION

INTRODUCTION

The Bendix/King KMD 250 is capable of being interfaced to an L-3 WX-

500 Stormscope® Series II Weather Mapping Sensor. The WX-500

detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms within a 200

nm radius of the aircraft. The information is then sent to the KMD 250

and will display the location of the electrical discharges both on the map

displays and on a dedicated Stormscope® display.

For a detailed description of the WX-500 and how to interpret the light-

ning display and a list of error codes, please reference the WX-500

Stormscope® User’s Guide.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

The antenna detects the electric and magnetic fields generated by intra-

cloud, inter-cloud, or cloud-to-ground electrical discharges that occur

within a 200 nm radius of the aircraft and sends the resulting "discharge

signals" to the processor. The processor digitizes, analyzes, and con-

verts the discharge signals into range and bearing data then stores the

data in memory. The WX-500 processor then communicates this infor-

mation to the KMD 250 as 'strikes' and 'cells'. The WX-500 updates the

KMD 250 every two seconds.

STORMSCOPE®FUNCTION STATUS ICONS

The Stormscope® Function Status Icons are located in the lower left of

the display. They are used to indicate whether or not the KMD 250 is

currently receiving and/or displaying Stormscope® information. The fol-

lowing table shows the various Stormscope® icons and their meanings:

Stormscope® Operation

Stormscope PG 8/13/07 10:00 AM Page 4-1

4-2

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 4

Stormscope®

Stormscope® Operation

OPERATION

As mentioned earlier, the WX-500 is controlled through the KMD 250.

The focus on this section is to provide both background information and

a more detailed explanation of the operating procedures. The following

text assumes you have both the WX-500 and the KMD 250 switched on

and that you have selected the Stormscope® display using the WX

Function Select Key on the KMD 250.

POWER-UP

At power-up, the WX-500 executes a power-up self test. The self test

takes approximately 25 seconds to ensure that all major WX-500 func-

tions are operating properly. During this period you may receive a NO

DATA RECEIVED FROM STORMSCOPE notification, this is normal.

Functions tested include antenna reception, memory and microprocessor

functions. An error message is displayed if a fault is detected.

HEADING STABILIZATION

Some aircraft are equipped with a remote heading reference, such as an

HSI with a slaved directional gyro. This allows the heading stabilization

feature to automatically adjust the position of the discharge points on the

display when the aircraft changes heading. The heading information

comes from a remote heading source installed in the aircraft that has

been connected to the WX-500. If this heading information is valid, the

WX-500 and KMD 250 will use it. In the absence of an external heading

reference, such as an aircraft with only a directional gyro, or the failure of

the heading reference, the KMD 250 will not allow stormscope strikes to

be overlaid on the Map Display. When no heading is available it is the

responsibility of the user to manually clear strikes after executing a

change in heading for reasons discussed in the next section.

CLEAR ALL DISCHARGE POINTS

Clearing the discharge points periodically while monitoring

thunderstorms is a good way to determine if the storm is

building or dissipating. Discharge points in a building storm will reappear

faster and in larger numbers. Discharge points in a dissipating storm will

appear slower and in smaller numbers. To clear the discharge points,

press the MENU Key then press the CLEAR STRIKES Softkey.

Clearing the display is especially important if an external heading refer-

ence is not used with the system or has failed. The display should be

cleared after changes in heading in order to make the displayed strikes

reflect their true position in relation to the aircraft.

Stormscope PG 8/13/07 10:00 AM Page 4-2

4-3

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 4

Stormscope®

SWITCH BETWEEN WEATHER VIEWS

When the Stormscope® display is selected the KMD 250 can display

strikes in one of two views, either all round (360°) or forward looking only

(120°). To switch the display turn the Rotary Knob to toggle between the

displays. Figure 4-1 is an example of the all round view and Figure 4-2

shows the forward looking view.

SWITCH BETWEEN DISPLAY MODES

The KMD 250 can display the

Stormscope® data in one of

two modes, either Cell Mode or

Strike Mode. To switch the dis-

play between modes press the

MENU Key to display Figure 4-

3. Press the CHANGE MODE

Softkey to toggle between

CELL MODE and STRIKE

MODE as shown in Figure 4-4.

The mode selected here will

remain in effect until you

change it, unless the unit is

turned off and back on.

Cell Display Mode

When viewing the

Stormscope® display, if cell

display mode is selected, the

KMD 250 plots a "+" symbol

(discharge point) on the display

when it detects associated dis-

charges within the selected

range and view (see Figure 4-

Stormscope® Operation

Figure 4-1 Figure 4-2

Figure 4-3

Figure 4-4

Stormscope PG 8/13/07 10:00 AM Page 4-3

4-4

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 4

Stormscope®

3). The KMD 250 will plot another "+" close to the first for each addi-

tional discharge determined to be associated with the group. The KMD

250 will not plot a "+" for any discharge not associated with a group

unless it's detected within a 25 nm radius of the aircraft. The effect of this

clustering algorithm is to display the location of storm cells instead of

individual discharges. The cell display mode is most useful during

periods of heavy electrical discharge activity. Using the cell display mode

during these periods frees the pilot from sifting through a display full of

discharge points to determine exactly where the storm cells are located.

If discharges are detected within 25 nm of the aircraft, the

stormscope icon in the Functions Legend will be displayed as

that shown here.

Strike Display Mode

If the strike display mode is selected, the KMD 250 immediately plots an

"x" symbol (discharge point) on the display for each individual discharge

it detects within the selected range and view. The strike display mode

plots discharge points on the display in relation to where the discharges

are actually detected instead of plotting them close to an associated

group of discharge points as is done in the cell display mode. The strike

display mode is most useful during periods of light electrical activity

because it may plot discharges associated with a building thunderstorm

sooner than the cell display mode would.

Again, if discharges are detected within 25 nm of the aircraft, the storm-

scope icon in the Functions Legend will be displayed as that shown pre-

viously.

CHANGING DISPLAY RANGE

To change the displayed range of the Stormscope® dis-

play, press the RNG ΔΔor RNG ∇∇keys. With each press of

the keys, the display changes to display the electrical dis-

charge activity detected within the new range. The range

indicator will also change to display the numerical value of

the new range (25, 50, 100, or 200 nm). This new range

corresponds to the distance from the aircraft to the outer

range ring on the display.

The KMD 250 stores electrical discharge information for all ranges simul-

taneously to provide an instant, up-to-date display of electrical discharge

activity when a new range is selected.

Stormscope® Operation

Stormscope PG 8/13/07 10:00 AM Page 4-4

4-5

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 4

Stormscope®

When moving from one range to the next, the 25 nm range is always

indicated by the solid inner ring to advise of close proximity to thunder-

storms. Also, notice that the discharge points are progressively larger on

the shorter ranges and smaller on the longer ranges. This effect makes it

easier to spot clusters of discharge points in any range.

OPERATION IN STORMSCOPE® MODE WITH FLIGHT PLAN

If the KMD 250 is receiving Flight Plan information from the GPS and a

valid heading input is available, the Flight Plan lines and waypoints will

be displayed on the Stormscope® displays.

NOTE: In order to align the lightning strikes correctly to the flight plan

lines, heading information is necessary.

OPERATION IN MAP DISPLAY

The majority of the text in this section refers to the Stormscope® displays

on the KMD 250. It is also possible however to see thunderstorm cell or

strike data while in the Map Display. The Stormscope® overlay must be

enabled on Map Setup Page 6.

NOTE: Lightning data will only be displayed on the map if a heading ref-

erence is available in the form of an external heading reference input

(described previously).

Any settings made while in the Stormscope® displays (i.e.

cell/strike mode, clear etc) will be carried over into the Map dis-

play. Lightning icons are shown here as they appear on the

Map display. The range at which lightning icons are displayed

is selectable on Map Setup Page 6.

CAUTION

Because the accuracy of the stormscope sensor is limited, do not

rely on the placement of lightning icons for map range settings less

than 25 nm.

Stormscope® Operation

Stormscope PG 8/13/07 10:00 AM Page 4-5

4-6

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 4

Stormscope®

Stormscope® Operation

Intentionally left blank

Stormscope PG 8/13/07 10:00 AM Page 4-6

SECTION 5

SYSTEM MESSAGES

VIEWING SYSTEM

MESSAGES

A system message is pre-

sented as MESSAGE PRESS

MENU in bold yellow text that

flashes alternating with the

page title at the bottom of the

screen as shown in Figure 5-1.

When the MENU Key is

pressed, the message will be

displayed as in Figure 5-2. In

this case the message is a FIS

Receiver Failure.

Pressing the OK Softkey will

exit the Message Page and the

yellow MESSAGE PRESS

MENU prompt will no longer

be displayed.

To access the system mes-

sage again, perform the fol-

lowing steps:

1. Press the MENU Key to

display the AUX MENU

Softkey as in Figure 5-3.

5-1

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 5

System Messages

Figure 5-1

Figure 5-2

Figure 5-3

Messages 8/13/07 10:01 AM Page 5-1

5-2

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 5

System Messages

2. Press the AUX MENU

Softkey to display the AUX-

MAIN MENU Page as shown

in Figure 5-4.

3. Use the Joystick to select

Messages as shown in Figure

5-4.

4. Press the SELECT

Softkey to display to display

the AUX-MESSAGES Page as

shown in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-4

Figure 5-5

Messages 8/13/07 10:01 AM Page 5-2

5-3

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 5

System Messages

The following table describes the possible system messages:

System Messages

Message Text Description

All User Settings Cleared To

Defaults

This message indicates that a problem was detected in the internal

memory storage for user preference settings. All settings have been

reset to their factory defaults.

Data Card Has Expired

Unable To Receive FIS Data

(VDL Only)

The data card contains information required for receiving FIS information.

The data card has expired and FIS information will no longer be avail-

able. Go to www.bendixking.com and order a data card update.

Data Card Update Required

For Continued Reception Of

FIS Data (VDL Only)

The data card contains information required for receiving FIS information.

If the data card is not updated soon, then FIS information will no longer

be available. Go to www.bendixking.com and order a data card update.

Duplicate User Waypoint In

Flight Plan Data

This message occurs if more than one user waypoint have the same

identifier. This usually means that the flight plan and user data file on

the datacard have been modified incorrectly. Check the flight plans to

make sure the waypoints in them are correct. Edit if necessary.

Error In Flight Plan File An error has occurred while reading the flight plan data from the data-

card. This usually means the flight plan file on the datacard has been

modified incorrectly. Check the flight plans to make sure the waypoints

in them are correct. Edit if necessary. It message persists after

repeated power cycles, replace the datacard.

Error Writing Flight Plan

Data To Datacard

An error has occurred when the flight plan data was being stored on the

datacard. This may indicate a faulty datacard. If the error persists,

replace the datacard.

FIS Data Not Received For

More Than 15 Minutes

The KMD 250 has previously received FIS data, but it has been over 15

minutes since the last reception. This is most likely due to the aircraft

being at an altitude or location outside of FIS network coverage. See the

FIS Network Status Page for locations of FIS transmitters and status.

FIS Decryption Processor

Error. FIS Data May Be

Unavailable (VDL Only)

The KMD 250 is unable to decrypt the FIS data due to FIS Decryption

Processor Error.

FIS Receiver Failure The KMD 250 is unable to communicate with the KDR 510 VDL Receiver

or the KDR 610 XM Receiver. If this message persists, it may indicate a

problem with the Receiver or a wiring problem between the KDR 510/610

and KMD 250.

FIS Subscription Database

Error. Update Data Card To

Receive FIS Data (VDL

Only)

This message occurs when an error is detected in the FIS Subscription

Data on the datacard. This usually means that the datacard is out of date

and needs to be updated in order to receive FIS data.

FIS Subscription Will Expire

Soon (VDL Only)

This message occurs when at least one FIS subscription is about to

expire. Check the subscription status on the Aux FIS Subscription page.

Go to www.bendixking.com to purchase a new subscription.

Flight Plan Waypoint(s) Not

Found In Database Have

Been Deleted

This message will be displayed if an invalid waypoint is found in a flight

plan. This usually means the flight plan file on the datacard has been

modified incorrectly. Check the flight plans to make sure the waypoints

in them are correct. Edit if necessary.

Inside SUA This message is displayed when the aircraft is within Special Use

Airspace. Alerting must be enabled on Navigation Setup Page.

Internal GPS Failure This message is displayed if the internal GPS receiver (if so equipped)

has failed. Turn the KMD 250 off and then back on. If the message

persists, the unit may need service.

Internal Temperature Has

Exceeded Limits. Turn Unit

Off

This message appears when the KMD 250 unit temperature is too high.

Turn the unit off to allow it to cool down. This may indicate that the airflow

around the KMD 250 has been blocked.

Invalid User Waypoint In

Flight Plan Data

Indicates that an invalid user waypoint is found in a flight plan. This

usually means the flight plan file on the datacard has been modified

incorrectly. Check flight plans to make sure the waypoints in them are

correct. Edit if necessary. If the error persists, replace the datacard.

Messages 8/13/07 10:01 AM Page 5-3

5-4

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Section 5

System Messages

Message Text Description

Nav Data Referenced To

True North

This message is displayed when a user-defined magnetic variation of 0

degrees is being used for navigation data. Check Navigation Setup

Page.

Nav Data Referenced To

User-Defined Mag Var

This message is displayed when a user-defined magnetic variation is

being used for navigation data. Check Navigation Setup Page.

No Valid FIS Subscriptions This message occurs when no current FIS subscriptions are available.

FIS data will be unavailable. Check the subscription status on the Aux

Menu FIS Subscription page. Go to www.bendixking.com to purchase a

new VDL subscription. Go to www.xmradio.com/weather to purchase a

new XM subscription. This is the only indication received when an XM

subscription has expired.

Regulated 12V Out Of

Range. Switch Unit Off

The internal 12V power supply is operating outside its acceptable range.

Turn the unit off and back on. If the message persists then the unit may

need service.

Regulated 5V Out Of Range.

Switch Unit Off

The internal 5V power supply is operating outside its acceptable range.

Turn the unit off and back on. If the message persists then the unit may

need service.

Regulated 3.3V Out Of

Range. Switch Unit Off

The internal 3.3V power supply is operating outside its acceptable range.

Turn the unit off and back on. If the message persists then the unit may

need service.

Regulated 3V Out Of Range.

Switch Unit Off

The internal 3V power supply is operating outside its acceptable range.

Turn the unit off and back on. If the message persists then the unit may

need service.

Stormscope Failure The KMD 250 is unable to communicate with the Stormscope® or it has

reported a failure. See the Stormscope® page for error codes and the

Stormscope® users manual for more information.

Traffic System Failure The KMD 250 is unable to communicate with the traffic system or the

traffic system has reported a failure.

Unit Configuration Cleared

To Defaults

A problem was detected in the memory used for storing the unit configu-

ration settings. The settings have been set back to factory defaults. In

most cases the unit will need to be reconfigured by an authorized

Bendix/King installer in order to operate properly.

Unit History Data Cleared To

Defaults

A problem was detected in the memory used to store unit history informa-

tion. The memory has effect on operation, it simply means less informa-

tion will be available to the service center if the unit requires service.

Messages 8/13/07 10:01 AM Page 5-4

A-1

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix A

Definitions, Abbreviations

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

DEFINITIONS

Alphabetic: any of the following characters (b/ is a space): b/ABCDE-

FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

Alphanumeric: any of the following characters (b/ is a space):

b/ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789

Automatic Leg Sequencing: As a waypoint is reached in the flight

plan, the next leg and waypoint of the flight plan automatically becomes

active.

Baud: bits per sec

Barometric Altitude: pressure altitude corrected for barometric

altimeter setting

Bearing To User Waypoint (BRG): bearing from the present position to

the active user waypoint measured clockwise relative to true or magnetic

north (true is implied unless magnetic is specified)

Cross Track Error: distance from the present position to the nearest

point on the desired course, and the direction (right or left) from the

desired course to the present position

Cursor Field: a character position or group of adjacent character posi-

tions on which a cursor can appear

Data Field: a character position or group of adjacent character positions

which display a single data item; a data field may be a single character

cursor field, or may contain multiple characters.

Data List: an ordered list of data elements which a given cursor field

can accept

Desired Track (DTK): The angle that the desired flight path makes with

respect to true north at the point nearest the present position. Magnetic

desired track uses the local magnetic variation.

Distance To Waypoint (DIS): distance from the present position to the

active waypoint

Ground Speed: absolute value of the rate of change of position

Headwind: difference between true airspeed and ground speed when

true airspeed is more than ground speed

Knots: Nautical Miles/hr

Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations

Appendix A 8/13/07 10:08 AM Page A-1

A-2

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix A

Basic Operation

Leg Mode: navigation of a route by picking the most direct route

between waypoints along the route.

OBS Course Mode: selecting a course to a waypoint based on setting

a specific bearing “to” or “from” the waypoint.

Special Use Airspace (SUA): any of the following: prohibited area,

restricted area, warning area, alert area, MOA, Class A through G,

unknown, danger, caution, training, CTA, or TMA type.

Tailwind: difference between ground speed and true airspeed when

ground speed is more than true airspeed.

Track (TRK): angle of the aircraft’s path over the ground measured

clockwise relative to north.

ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

AAS: Aeronautical Advisory Service

ACT: Active (user waypoint or flight plan)

ADF: Automatic Direction Finder

AFIS: Aerodrome Flight Information Service

AGL: Above Ground Level

ALT: Altitude

AMR: Americas data area

ANSI: American National Standards Institute

APR: Approach

APT: Airport

ARTCC: Air Route Traffic Control Center

ARVL: Arrival

ASOS: Automated Surface Observation System

ATC: Air Traffic Control

ATF: Aerodrome Traffic Frequency

ATI: Atlantic International data area

ATIS: Automatic Terminal Information Service

AWOS: Automated Weather Observing System

A/C: Aircraft

BRG: Bearing

Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations

Appendix A 8/13/07 10:08 AM Page A-2

A-3

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix A

Definitions, Abbreviations

CAA: Civil Aviation Authority

CAS: Calibrated Airspeed

CL B: Class B Airspace

CL C: Class C Airspace

CLR: Clearance Delivery

com: communication

CDI: Course Deviation Indicator

CTA: Control Area

CTAF: Common Traffic Advisory Frequency

CTR: Control Zone or Center

dB: decibels

DEP: Departure

DIR: Director (approach control/radar)

DIS: Distance

Dgr: Danger

DME: Distance Measuring Equipment

DOT: United States Department of Transportation

DTK: Desired Track

EFIS: Electronic Flight Instrument System

ESA: Enroute Safe Altitude

ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival

ETE: Estimated Time Enroute

FAA: Federal Aviation Administration

FAR: Federal Aviation Regulations

FIR: Flight Information Region

FIS: Flight Information Services

FIS-B: Flight Information Services - Broadcast

FLT: Flight

FPL: Flight Plan

FPM: Feet Per Minute

FSS: Flight Service Station

FT: Feet

Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations

Appendix A 8/13/07 10:08 AM Page A-3

A-4

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix A

Basic Operation

GCO: Ground Communications Outlet

GPS: Global Positioning System

GND: Ground

GRND: Ground

hr: hour

HSI: Horizontal Situation Indicator

IFR: Instrument Flight Rules

IGS: Instrument Guidance System (used outside U.S. only)

ILS: Instrument Landing System

in.: inches

INT: Intersection

Kt.: Knots

LAT: Latitude

LB: Pounds

LBC: Localizer Back Course

LDA: Localizer Type Directional Aid Approach

LOC: Localizer Approach

LON: Longitude

m: meters

MATZ: Military Air Traffic Zone (used outside the U.S. only)

mB: millibars

MCOM: Multicom

MF: Mandatory Frequency

mi: statute miles

min: minutes

MLS: Microwave Landing System

MOA: Military Operation Area

MSA: Minimum Safe Altitude

MSL: Mean Sea Level

msec: milliseconds

NDB: Non-Directional Beacon

Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations

Appendix A 8/13/07 10:08 AM Page A-4

A-5

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix A

Definitions, Abbreviations

NM: Nautical Miles

NO APR: No Approach

NPA: Non-Precision Approach

NP APR: Non-Precision Approach

NVM: Non Volatile Memory

OBI: Omni-directional Bearing Indicator

OBS: Omni-directional Bearing Selector

Obs: Obstacle

OSGB: Ordnance Survey of Great Britain

PAI: Pacific International data area

PETE: Pointer ETE

Phb: Prohibited (Airspace)

PPOS: Present Position

PTAX: Pre-Taxi Clearance

RAD: Radial

RDO: Radio

RDR: Radar-Only Frequency

REF: Reference

Res: Restricted (Airspace)

RMI: Radio Magnetic Indicator

SDF: Simplified Directional Facility Approach

sec: seconds

SPD: Speed

SUA: Special Use Airspace

TKE: Track Angle Error

TMA: Terminal Area

TOPO: Topographical Data (i.e. coastlines, terrain, rivers,

lakes etc)

TRFC: Traffic

TRK: Actual Track

TRSA: Terminal Radar Service Area

TWR: Tower

Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations

Appendix A 8/13/07 10:08 AM Page A-5

A-6

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

UIR: Upper Information Region

UNIC: Unicom

UNS: Unspecified

UTC: Universal Coordinated Time (same as Greenwich

Mean Time)

UTM: Universal Transverse Mercator

V: Volts

VDL: VHF Data Link

VHF: Very High Frequency

VOR: Very High Frequency Omni-directional Radio

Range

VRP: Visual Reference Point

WPT: Waypoint

XM: XM Satellite Weather

XTK: Cross Track Error

°C: degrees Celsius

°F: degrees Fahrenheit

Appendix A

Basic Operation

Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations

Appendix A 8/13/07 10:08 AM Page A-6

B-1

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

Common Weather Abbreviations

ABNDT Abundant

ABNML Abnormal

ABT About

ABV Above

AC Convective outlook

or altocumulus

ACC Altocumulus castel-

lanus clouds

ACCAS Altocumulus castel-

lanus clouds

ACFT MSHP Aircraft Mishap

ACCUM Accumulate

ACFT Aircraft

ACLT Accelerate

ACLTD Accelerated

ACLTG Accelerating

ACLTS Accelerates

ACPY Accompany

ACRS Across

ACSL Altocumulus

standing lenticular

ACTV Active

ACTVTY Activity

ACYC Anticyclone

ADJ Adjacent

ADL Additional

ADQT Adequate

ADQTLY Adequately

ADRNDCK Adirondack

ADVCT Advect

ADVCTD Advected

ADVCTG Advecting

ADVCTN Advection

ADVCTS Advects

ADVN Advance

ADVNG Advancing

ADVY Advisory

ADVYS Advisories

AFCT Affect

AFCTD Affected

AFCTG Affecting

AFDK After dark

AFOS Automated Field

Operations System

AFSS Automated Flight

Service Station

AFT After

AFTN Afternoon

AGL Above ground level

AGN Again

AGRD Agreed

AGRS Agrees

AGRMT Agreement

AHD Ahead

AIRMET Airman’s Meteoro-

logical Information

AK Alaska

AL Alabama

ALF Aloft

ALG Along

ALGHNY Allegheny

ALP Airport Location

Point

ALQDS All quadrants

ALSTG Altimeter setting

ALT Altitude

ALTA Alberta

ALTHO Although

ALTM Altimeter

ALUTN Aleutian

AMD Amend

AMDD Amended

AMDG Amending

AMDT Amendment

AMP Amplify

AMPG Amplifying

AMPLTD Amplitude

AMS Air mass

AMT Amount

ANLYS Analysis

APPENDIX B

COMMON WEATHER ABBREVIATIONS

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-1

B-2

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

Common Weather Abbreviations

ANS Answer

AO1 Automated

Reporting Station

AO2 Automated

Reporting Station

AOA At or above

AOB At or below

AP Anomalous

Propagation

APCH Approach

APCHG Approaching

APCHS Approaches

APLCN Appalachian

APLCNS Appalachians

APPR Appear

APPRG Appearing

APPRS Appears

APRNT Apparent

APRNTLY Apparently

APRX Approximate

APRXLY Approximately

AR Arkansas

ARL Air Resources Lab

ARND Around

ARPT Airport

ASAP As soon as possible

ASL Above Sea Level

ASMD As Amended

ASOS Automated Surface

Observing System

ASSOCD Associated

ASSOCN Association

ATCT Air Traffic Control

Tower

ATLC Atlantic

ATTM At this time

ATTN Attention

AUTO Automated report

AVBL Available

AVG Average

AVN Aviation model

AWC Aviation Weather

Center

AWIPS Advanced Interactive

Weather Processing

System

AWOS Automated Weather

Observing system

AWT Awaiting

AWW Alert Weather Watch

AZ Arizona

AZM Azimuth

B Began

BACLIN Baroclinic

BAJA Baja, California

BATROP Barotropic

BC British Columbia or

patches (descriptor

used with FG)

BCFG Patchy fog

BCH Beach

BCKG Backing

BCM Become

BCMG Becoming

BCMS Becomes

BD Blowing dust

BDA Bermuda

BDRY Boundary

BECMG Becoming

BFDK Before dark

BFR Before

BGN Begin

BGNG Beginning

BGNS Begins

BHND Behind

BINOVC Breaks in overcast

BKN Broken

BL Blowing

BLD Build

BLDG Building

BLDS Builds

BLDUP Buildup

BLKHLS Black Hills

BLKT Blanket

BLKTG Blanketing

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-2

B-3

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

Common Weather Abbreviations

BLKTS Blankets

BLO Below or below

clouds

BLW Below

BLZD Blizzard

BN Blowing sand

BND Bound

BNDRY Boundary

BNDRYS Boundaries

BNTH Beneath

BOOTHEEL Bootheel

BR Branch or mist

(METAR, used only

for visibility between

5/8 and 6 miles)

BRF Brief

BRG Branching

BRK Break

BRKG Breaking

BRKHIC Breaks in higher

clouds

BRKS Breaks

BRKSHR Berkshire

BRKSHRS Berkshires

BRM Barometer

BRN Bulk Richardson

Number

BRS Branches

BS Blowing snow

BTWN Between

BWER Bounded weak

echo region

BYD Beyond

C Celsius

CA California or cloud-

to-air lightning in

PIREPs

CAA Cold air advection

CAPE Convective available

potential energy

CARIB Caribbean

CAS Committee for

Aviation Services

CASCDS Cascades

CAT Clear air turbulence

CAVOK Ceiling and visibility

CAVU Ceiling and visibility

unlimited

CB Cumulonimbus

CBMAM Cumulonimbus

Mammatus clouds

CC Cirrocumulus

CCCC Generic WMO format

code group for a

four-letter location

identifier

CCL Convective conden-

sation level

CCLDS Clear of clouds

CCLKWS Counterclockwise

CCSL Cirrocumulus

standing lenticular

CCx Code used in the

WMO abbreviated

heading to indicate

a corrected forecast,

where x is the letter

A through X

CDFNT Cold front

CDFNTL Cold frontal

CFP Cold front passage

CG Cloud to ground

(lightning)

CHC Chance

CHCS Chances

CHG Change

CHGD Changed

CHGG Changing

CHGS Changes

CHI Cloud-Height

indicator

CHINO Sky condition at

secondary location

not available

CHOP Turbulence type

characterized by

rapid, rhythmic jolts

CHSPK Chesapeake

CI Cirrus

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-3

B-4

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

Common Weather Abbreviations

CIG Ceiling

CIGS Ceilings

CIN Convective inhibition

CLD Cloud

CLDNS Cloudiness

CLDS Clouds

CLKWS Clockwise

CLR Clear

CLRG Clearing

CLRS Clears

CMPLX Complex

CNCL Cancel

CNCLD Canceled

CNCLG Canceling

CNCLS Cancels

CNDN Canadian

CNTR Center

CNTRD Centered

CNTRLN Centerline

CNTRS Centers

CNTRL Central

CNTY County

CNTYS Counties

CNVG Converge

CNVGG Converging

CNVGNC Convergence

CNVTN Convection

CNVTV Convective

CNVTVLY Convectively

CONFDC Confidence

CO Colorado

COMPAR Compare

COMPARG Comparing

COMPARD Compared

COMPARS Compares

COMPR Compare

COMPRG Comparing

COMPRD Compared

COMPRS Compares

COND Condition

CONS Continuous

CONT Continue

CONTD Continued

CONTLY Continually

CONTG Continuing

CONTRAILS Condensation trails

CONTS Continues

CONTDVD Continental Divide

CONUS Continental U.S.

COORD Coordinate

COR Correction

CPBL Capable

CPC Climate Prediction

Center

CRC Circle

CRCLC Circulate

CRCLN Circulation

CRLC Circulate

CRLN Circulation

CRNR Corner

CRNRS Corners

CRS Course

CS Cirrostratus

CSDR Consider

CSDRBL Considerable

CST Coast

CSTL Coastal

CT Connecticut

CTC Contact

CTGY Category

CTSKLS Catskills

CU Cumulus

CUFRA Cumulus fractus

CVR Cover

CVRD Covered

CVRG Covering

CVRS Covers

CWSU Center Weather

Service Units

CYC Cyclonic

CYCLGN Cyclogenesis

DABRK Daybreak

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-4

B-5

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

Common Weather Abbreviations

DALGT Daylight

DBL Double

DC District of Columbia

DCR Decrease

DCRD Decreased

DCRG Decreasing

DCRGLY Decreasingly

DCRS Decreases

DE Delaware

DEG Degree

DEGS Degrees

DELMARVA Delaware-Maryland-

Virginia

DFCLT Difficult

DFCLTY Difficulty

DFNT Definite

DFNTLY Definitely

DFRS Differs

DFUS Diffuse

DGNL Diagonal

DGNLLY Diagonally

DIGG Digging

DIR Direction

DISC Discontinue

DISCD Discontinued

DISCG Discontinuing

DISRE Disregard

DISRED Disregarded

DISREG Disregarding

DKTS Dakotas

DLA Delay

DLAD Delayed

DLT Delete

DLTD Deleted

DLTG Deleting

DLY Daily

DMG Damage

DMGD Damaged

DMGG Damaging

DMNT Dominant

DMSH Diminish

DMSHD Diminished

DMSHG Diminishing

DMSHS Diminishes

DNDFTS Downdrafts

DNS Dense

DNSLP Downslope

DNSTRM Downstream

DNWND Downwind

DP Deep

DPND Deepened

DPNG Deepening

DPNS Deepens

DPR Deeper

DPTH Depth

DR Low Drifting

(descriptor used

with DU, SA or SN

DRDU Drifting dust

DRFT Drift

DRFTD Drifted

DRFTG Drifting

DRFTS Drifts

DRSA Low drifting sand

DRSN Low drifting snow

DRZL Drizzle

DS Duststorm

DSCNT Descent

DSIPT Dissipate

DSIPTD Dissipated

DSIPTG Dissipating

DSIPTN Dissipation

DSIPTS Dissipates

DSND Descend

DSNDG Descending

DSNDS Descends

DSNT Distant

DSTBLZ Destabilize

DSTBLZD Destabilized

DSTBLZG Destabilizing

DSTBLZS Destabilizes

DSTBLZN Destabilization

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-5

B-6

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

DSTC Distance

DTRT Deteriorate

DTRTD Deteriorated

DTRTG Deteriorating

DTRTS Deteriorates

DU Widespread dust

storm

DURC During climb

DURD During descent

DURG During

DURGC During climb

DURGD During descent

DURN Duration

DVLP Develop

DVLPD Developed

DVLPG Developing

DVLPMT Development

DVLPS Develops

DVRG Diverge

DVRGG Diverging

DVRGNC Divergence

DVRGS Diverges

DVV Downward vertical

velocity

DWNDFTS Downdrafts

DWPNT Dew point

DWPNTS Dew points

DX Duplex

DZ Drizzle (METAR)

E East

EBND Eastbound

EFCT Effect

ELNGT Elongate

ELNGTD Elongated

ELSW Elsewhere

EMBD Embedded

EMBDD Embedded

EMERG Emergency

ENCTR Encounter

ENDG Ending

ENE East-northeast

ENELY East-northeasterly

ENERN East-northeastern

ENEWD East-northeastward

ENHNC Enhance

ENHNCD Enhanced

ENHNCG Enhancing

ENHNCS Enhances

ENHNCMNT Enhancement

ENRT Enroute

ENTR Entire

ERN Eastern

ERY Early

ERYR Earlier

ESE East-southeast

ESELY East-southeasterly

ESERN East-southeastern

ESEWD East-southeastward

ESNTL Essential

ESTAB Establish

EST Estimate

ESTS Estimates

ETA Estimated time of

arrival or ETA

model

ETC Et cetera

ETIM Elapsed time

EVE Evening

EWD Eastward

EXCLV Exclusive

EXCLVLY Exclusively

EXCP Except

EXPC Expect

EXPCD Expected

EXPCG Expecting

EXTD Extend

EXTDD Extended

EXTDG Extending

EXTDS Extends

EXTN Extension

EXTRAP Extrapolate

EXTRAPD Extrapolated

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-6

B-7

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

EXTRM Extreme

EXTRMLY Extremely

EXTSV Extensive

F Fahrenheit

FA Aviation area fore-

cast

FAH Fahrenheit

FAM Familiar

FC Funnel cloud

(+FC = Tornado or

water spout)

FCST Forecast

FCSTD Forecasted

FCSTG Forecasting

FCSTR Forecaster

FCSTS Forecasts

FEW Few (used to

describe cloud

cover or weather

phenomena, >0

octas to 2 octas

cloud amount)

FG Fog (METAR, only

when visibility is

less than 5/8 mile)

FIBI Filed but impracti-

cable to transmit

FIG Figure

FILG Filling

FIR Flight information

region

FIRAV First available

FIS Flight Information

Service

FIS-B Flight Information

Service - Broadcast

FIRST First observation

after a break in cov-

erage at manual

station

FL Florida or flight level

FLG Falling

FLRY Flurry

FLRYS Flurries

FLT Flight

FLW Follow

FLWG Following

FM From

FMGGgg From the time (UTC)

indicated by GGgg.

Generic WMO format

code group, indi-

cating a significant

and rapid (in less

than 1 hour) change

to a new set of

prevailing conditions

FMT Format

FNCTN Function

FNT Front

FNTL Frontal

FNTS Fronts

FNTGNS Frontogenesis

FNTLYS Frontolysis

FORNN Forenoon

FPM Feet per minute

FQT Frequent

FQTLY Frequently

FRM Form

FRMG Forming

FRMN Formation

FROPA Frontal passage

FROSFC Frontal surface

FRQ Frequent

FRST Frost

FRWF Forecast wind factor

FRZ Freeze

FRZLVL Freezing level

FRZN Frozen

FRZG Freezing

FT Feet or

Terminal Forecast

FTHR Further

FU Smoke

FV Flight visibility

FVRBL Favorable

FWD Forward

FYI For your information

FZ Freezing

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-7

B-8

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

FZRANO Freezing rain

sensor not available

G Gust

GA Georgia

GEN General

GENLY Generally

GEO Geographic

GEOREF Geographical refer-

ence

GF Fog

GICG Glaze icing

GLFALSK Gulf of Alaska

GLFCAL Gulf of California

GLFMEX Gulf of Mexico

GLFSTLAWR Gulf of St.

Lawrence

GND Ground

GNDFG Ground fog

GOES Geostationary

Operational

Environmental

Satellite

GR Hail (greater than

1/4 inch in diam-

eter)

GRAD Gradient

GRDL Gradual

GRDLY Gradually

GRT Great

GRTLY Greatly

GRTR Greater

GRTST Greatest

GRTLKS Great Lakes

GS Small hail or snow

pellets (smaller than

1/4 inch in diameter)

GSTS Gusts

GSTY Gusty

GTS Global Telecommuni-

cation System

GV Ground visibility

HAZ Hazard

HCVIS High clouds visible

HDFRZ Hard freeze

HDSVLY Hudson Valley

HDWND Head wind

HGT Height

HI High or Hawaii

HIER Higher

HIFOR High level forecast

HLF Half

HLTP Hilltop

HLSTO Hailstones

HLYR Haze layer

HND Hundred

HPC Hydrometeorological

Prediction Center

HR Hour

HRS Hours

HRZN Horizon

HTG Heating

HURCN Hurricane

HUREP Hurricane report

HV Have

HVY Heavy

HVYR Heavier

HVYST Heaviest

HWVR However

HWY Highway

HZ Haze

IA Iowa

IC Ice crystals or ice

ICAO International Civil

Aviation

Organization

ICG Icing

ICGIC Icing in clouds

ICGICIP Icing in clouds and

in precipitation

ICGIP Icing in precipitation

ID Idaho

IFR Instrument flight

rules

IL Illinois

IMC Instrument meteo-

rolgical conditions

IMDT Immediate

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-8

B-9

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

IMDTLY Immediately

IMPL Impulse

IMPLS Impulses

IMPT Important

INCL Include

INCLD Included

INCLG Including

INCLS Includes

INCR Increase

INCRD Increased

INCRG Increasing

INCRGLY Increasingly

INCRS Increases

INDC Indicate

INDCD Indicated

INDCG Indicating

INDCS Indicates

INDEF Indefinite

INFO Information

INLD Inland

INSTBY Instability

INTCNTL Intercontinental

INTER Intermittent

INTL International

INTMD Intermediate

INTMT Intermittent

INTMTLY Intermittently

INTR Interior

INTRMTRGN Intermountain

region

INTS Intense

INTSFCN Intensification

INTSFY Intensify

INTSFYD Intensified

INTSFYG Intensifying

INTSFYS Intensifies

INTSTY Intensity

INTVL Interval

INVRN Inversion

IOVC In overcast

INVOF In vicinity of

IP Ice pellets

IPV Improve

IPVG Improving

IR Infrared

ISOL Isolate

ISOLD Isolated

JCTN Junction

JTSTR Jet stream

KFRST Killing frost

KLYR Smoke layer aloft

KOCTY Smoke over city

KS Kansas

KT Knots

KY Kentucky

L Left

LA Louisiana

LABRDR Labrador

LAPS Local Analysis and

Prediction System

LAMP Local AWIPS MOS

Program

LAST Last observation

before a break in

coverage at a

manual station

LAT Latitude

LAWRS Limited aviation

weather reporting

station

LCL Local or Lifted

condensation level

LCLY Locally

LCTD Located

LCTN Location

LCTMP Little change in tem-

perature

LDG Landing

LEVEL Level

LFM Limited fine mesh

model

LFTG Lifting

LGRNG Long-range

LGT Light

LGTR Lighter

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-9

B-10

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

LGWV Long wave

LI Lifted Index

LIFR Low instrument

flight rules

LIS Lifted Indices

LK Lake

LKS Lakes

LKLY Likely

LLJ Low level jet

LLWAS Low-level wind

shear alert system

LLWS Low-level wind

shear

LMTD Limited

LMTG Limiting

LMTS Limits

LN Line

LNS LInes

LO Low

LONG Longitude

LONGL Longitudinal

LRG Large

LRGLY Largely

LRGR Larger

LRGST Largest

LST Local standard time

LTD Limited

LTG Lightning

LTGCA Lightning cloud-to-

air

LTGCC Lightning cloud-to-

cloud

LTGCG Lightning cloud-to-

ground

LTGCCCG Lightning cloud-to-

cloud cloud-to-

ground

LTGCW Lightning cloud-to-

water

LTGIC Lightning in cloud

LTL Little

LTLCG Little change

LTR Later

LTST Latest

LV Leaving

LVL Level

LVLS Levels

LWR Lower

LWRD Lowered

LWRG Lowering

LYR Layer

LYRD Layered

LYRS Layers

M Minus or Less than

lowest sensor value

MA Massachusetts

MAN Manitoba

MAX Maximum

MB Millibars

MCD Mesoscale discus-

sion

MD Maryland

MDFY Modify

MDFYD Modified

MDFYG Modifying

MDL Model

MDLS Models

MDT Moderate

MDTLY Moderately

ME Maine

MED Medium

MEGG Merging

MESO Mesoscale

MET Meteorological

METAR Aviation Routine

Weather Report

METRO Metropolitan

MEX Mexico

MHKVLY Mohawk Valley

MI Michigan , shallow,

or mile

MID Middle

MIDN Midnight

MIL Military

MIN Minimum

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-10

B-11

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

MIFG Shallow fog

MISG Missing

MLTLVL Melting level

MN Minnesota

MNLD Mainland

MNLY Mainly

MO Missouri

MOD Moderate

MOGR Moderate or greater

MOS Model Output

Statistics

MOV Move

MOVD Moved

MOVG Moving

MOVMT Movement

MOVS Moves

MPH Miles per hour

MRGL Marginal

MRGLLY Marginally

MRNG Morning

MRTM Maritime

MS Mississippi

MSG Message

MSL Mean sea level

MST Most

MSTLY Mostly

MSTR Moisture

MT Montana

MTN Mountain

MTNS Mountains

MULT Multiple

MULTILVL Multilevel

MVFR Marginal visual

flight rules

MWO Meteorological

Watch Office

MX Mixed (character-

ized as a combina-

tion of clear and

rime ice

MXD Mixed

N North

N/A Not applicable

NAB Not above

NAT North Atlantic

NATL National

NAV Navigation

NAVAID Electronic naviga-

tion aid facility (lim-

ited to VOR or

VORTAC for

PIREPs)

NB New Brunswick

NBND Northbound

NBRHD Neighborhood

NC North Carolina

NCDC National Climatic

Data Center

NCEP National Center of

Environmental

Prediction

NCO NCEP Central

Operations

NCWX No change in

weather

ND North Dakota

NE Northeast

NEB Nebraska

NEC Necessary

NEG Negative

NEGLY Negatively

NELY Northeasterly

NERN Northeastern

NEWD Northeastward

NEW ENG New England

NFLD Newfoundland

NGM Nested grid model

NGT Night

NH New Hampshire

NHC National Hurricane

Center

NIL None

NJ New Jersey

NL No layers

NLT Not later than

NLY Northerly

NM New Mexico

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-11

B-12

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

NMBR Number

NMBRS Numbers

NMC National

Meteorological

Center

NML Normal

NMRS Numerous

NNE North-northeast

NNELY North-northeasterly

NNERN North-northeastern

NNEWD North-northeast-

ward

NNW North-northwest

NNWLY North-northwesterly

NNWRN North-northwestern

NNWWD North-northwest-

ward

NNNN End of message

NOAA National Oceanic

and Atmospheric

Administration

NOPAC Northern Pacific

NOS National Ocean

Service

NOSPECI No SPECI reports

are taken at station

NPRS Nonpersistent

NR Near

NRLY Nearly

NRN Northern

NRW Narrow

NS Nova Scotia

NSC No significant cloud

NSW No significant

weather

NTFY Notify

NTFYD Notified

NV Nevada

NVA Negative vorticity

advection

NW Northwest

NWD Northward

NWLY Northwesterly

NWRN Northwestern

NWS National Weather

Service

NY New York

NXT Next

OAT Outside air temper -

ature

OBND Outbound

OBS Observation

OBSC Obscure

OBSCD Obscured

OBSCG Obscuring

OCFNT Occluded front

OCLD Occlude

OCLDS Occludes

OCLDD Occluded

OCLDG Occluding

OCLN Occlusion

OCNL Occasional

OCNLY Occasionally

OCR Occur

OCRD Occurred

OCRG Occurring

OCRS Occurs

OFC Office

OFCM Office of the

Federal Coordinator

for Meteorology

OFP Occluded frontal

passage

OFSHR Offshore

OH Ohio

OHD Overhead

OK Oklahoma

OMTNS Over mountains

ONSHR On shore

OR Oregon

ORGPHC Orographic

ORIG Original

OSV Ocean station

vessel

OTLK Outlook

OTP On top

OTR Other

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-12

B-13

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

OTRW Otherwise

OUTFLO Outflow

OV Over

OVC Overcast

OVHD Overhead

OVNGT Overnight

OVR Over

OVRN Overrun

OVRNG Overrunning

OVTK Overtake

OVTKG Overtaking

OVTKS Overtakes

P Higher than greatest

sensor value

P6SM Visibility forecast to

be greater than 6

statute miles

PA Pennsylvania

PAC Pacific

PATWAS Pilot's automatic

telephone weather

answering service

PBL Planetary boundary

layer

PCPN Precipitation

PD Period

PDS Periods

PDMT Predominant

PE Ice pellets

PEN Peninsula

PERM Permanent

PGTSND Puget Sound

PHYS Physical

PIBAL Pilot balloon obser-

vation

PIREP Pilot weather report

PK WND Peak wind

PL Ice pellets

PLNS Plains

PLS Please

PLTO Plateau

PM Postmeridian

PNHDL Panhandle

PNO Precipitation amount

not available

PO Dust/ sand swirls

POS Positive

POSLY Positively

PPINA Radar weather

report not available

PPINE Radar weather

report no echoes

observed

PPSN Present position

PR Partial

PRBL Probable

PRBLY Probably

PRBLTY Probability

PRECD Precede

PRECDD Preceded

PRECDG Preceding

PRECDS Precedes

PRES Pressure

PRESFR Pressure falling

rapidly

PRESRR Pressure rising

rapidly

PRFG Partial fog

PRIM Primary

PRIN Principal

PRIND Present indications

are...

PRJMP Pressure jump

PROB Probability

PROBC C Forecaster’s

assessment of the

probability of occur-

rence of a thunder-

storm or precipita-

tion event, along

with associated

weather elements

(wind, visibility,

and/or sky condi-

tion) whose occur-

rences are directly

related to, and con-

temporaneous with,

the thunderstorm or

precipitation event

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-13

B-14

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

PROC Procedure

PROD Produce

PRODG Producing

PROG Forecast

PROGD Forecasted

PROGS Forecasts

PRSNT Present

PRSNTLY Presently

PRST Persist

PRSTS Persists

PRSTNC Persistence

PRSTNT Persistent

PRVD Provide

PRVDD Provided

PRVDG Providing

PRVDS Provides

PS Plus

PSBL Possible

PSBLY Possibly

PSBLTY Possibility

PSG Passage

PSN Position

PSND Positioned

PTCHY Patchy

PTLY Partly

PTNL Potential

PTNLY Potentially

PTNS Portions

PUGET Puget Sound

PVA Positive vorticity

advection

PVL Prevail

PVLD Prevailed

PVLG Prevailing

PVLS Prevails

PVLT Prevalent

PWB Pilot weather

briefing

PWINO Precipitation identi-

fier sensor not avail-

able

PWR Power

PY Spray

QN Question

QPFERD NCEP excessive

rainfall discussion

QPFHSD NCEP heavy snow

discussion

QPFSPD NCEP special

precipitation discus-

sion

QSTNRY Quasistationary

QTR Quarter

QUAD Quadrant

QUE Quebec

R Right (with reference

to runway designa-

tion) or rain

RA Rain (METAR)

RADAT Radiosonde addi-

tional data

RAOB Radiosonde obser-

vation

RCA Reach Cruising

Altitude

RCH Reach

RCHD Reached

RCHG Reaching

RCHS Reaches

RCKY Rocky

RCKYS Rockies

RCMD Recommend

RCMDD Recommended

RCMDG Recommending

RCMDS Recommends

RCRD Record

RCRDS Records

RCV Receive

RCVD Received

RCVG Receiving

RCVS Receives

RDC Reduce

RDGG Ridging

RDR Radar

RDVLP Redevelop

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-14

B-15

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

RDVLPG Redeveloping

RDVLPMT Redevelopment

RE Regard

RECON Reconnaissance

REF Reference

RES Reserve

REPL Replace

REPLD Replaced

REPLG Replacing

REPLS Replaces

REQ Request

REQS Requests

REQSTD Requested

RESP Response

RESTR Restrict

RGD Ragged

RGL Regional model

RGLR Regular

RGN Region

RGNS Regions

RGT Right

RH Relative humidity

RHINO RHI not operative

RI Rhode Island

RIME Type of icing char-

acterized by a rough,

milky, opaque

appearance

RIOGD Rio Grande

RLBL Reliable

RLTV Relative

RLTVLY Relatively

RM Remarks

RMK Remark

RMN Remain

RMND Remained

RMNDR Remainder

RMNG Remaining

RMNS Remains

RNFL Rainfall

RNG Range

ROT Rotate

ROTD Rotated

ROTG Rotating

ROTS Rotates

RPD Rapid

RPDLY Rapidly

RPLC Replace

RPLCD Replaced

RPLCG Replacing

RPLCS Replaces

RPRT Report

RPRTD Reported

RPRTG Reporting

RPRTS Reports

RPT Repeat

RPTG Repeating

RPTS Repeats

RQR Require

RQRD Required

RQRG Requiring

RQRS Requires

RRx Code used in the

WMO abbreviated

heading to indicate

a delayed forecast,

where x is the letter

A through X

RS Receiver station

RSG Rising

RSN Reason

RSNG Reasoning

RSNS Reasons

RSTR Restrict

RSTRD Restricted

RSTRG Restricting

RSTRS Restricts

RTRN Return

RTRND Returned

RTRNG Returning

RTRNS Returns

RUC Rapid Update Cycle

RUF Rough

RUFLY Roughly

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-15

B-16

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

RVR Runway Visual

Range

RVRNO RVR system not

available

RVS Revise

RVSD Revised

RVSG Revising

RVSS Revises

RW Rain shower

RWY Runway

RY Runway

S South

SA Sand (METAR)

SAB Satellite Analysis

Branch

SAO Surface observation

SASK Saskatchewan

SATFY Satisfactory

SBND Southbound

SBSD Subside

SBSDD Subsided

SBSDNC Subsidence

SBSDS Subsides

SC South Carolina or

stratocumulus

SCND Second

SCNDRY Secondary

SCSL Stratocumulus

standing lenticular

SCT Scatter or Scattered

(describing cloud

cover or weather

phenomena, 3 to 4

octas cloud amount

SCTD Scattered

SCTR Sector

SD South Dakota

SE Southeast

SEC Second

SELY Southeasterly

SEPN Separation

SEQ Sequence

SERN Southeastern

SEV Severe

SEWD Southeastward

SFC Surface

SFERICS Atmospherics

SG Snow grains

SGFNT Significant

SGFNTLY Significantly

SH Showers

SHFT Shift

SHFTD Shifted

SHFTG Shifting

SHFTS Shifts

SHLD Shield

SHLW Shallow

SHRT Short

SHRTLY Shortly

SHRTWV Shortwave

SHUD Should

SHWR Shower

SIERNEV Sierra Nevada

SIG Signature

SIGMET Significant meteoro-

logical information

SIMUL Simultaneous

SK Sky cover

SKC Sky clear

SKED Schedule

SLD Solid

SLGT Slight

SLGTLY Slightly

SLO Slow

SLOLY Slowly

SLOR Slower

SLP Slope or sea level

pressure

SLPG Sloping

SLPNO Sea-level pressure

not available

SLT Sleet

SLW Slow

SLY Southerly

SM Statute mile

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-16

B-17

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

SMK Smoke

SML Small

SMLR Smaller

SMRY Summary

SMS Sunchronous mete-

orological satellite

SMTH Smooth

SMTHR Smoother

SMTHST Smoothest

SMTM Sometime

SMWHT Somewhat

SN Snow

SNBNK Snowbank

SND Sand

SNFLK Snowflake

SNGL Single

SNOINCR Snow increase

SNOINCRG Snow increasing

SNST Sunset

SNW Snow

SNWFL Snowfall

SOP Standard operating

procedure

SP Snow pellets

SPC Storm Prediction

Center

SPCLY Especially

SPD Speed

SPECI Special observation

SPENES Satellite precip.

estimate statement

SPKL Sprinkle

SPLNS Southern Plains

SPRD Spread

SPRDG Spreading

SPRDS Spreads

SPRL Spiral

SQ Squall

SQAL Squall

SQLN Squall line

SR Sunrise

SRN Southern

SRND Surround

SRNDD Surrounded

SRNDG Surrounding

SRNDS Surrounds

SS Sunset or sand

storm (METAR)

SSE South-southeast

SSELY South-southeasterly

SSERN South-southeastern

SSEWD South-southeastward

SSW South-southwest

SSWLY South-southwesterly

SSWRN South-southwestern

SSWWD South-southwest-

ward

ST Stratus

STAGN Stagnation

STBL Stable

STBLTY Stability

STD Standard

STDY Steady

STFR Stratus fractus

STFRM Stratiform

STG Strong

STGLY Strongly

STGR Stronger

STGST Strongest

STLT Satellite

STM Storm

STMS Storms

STN Station

STNRY Stationary

SUB Substitute

SUBTRPCL Subtropical

SUF Sufficient

SUFLY Sufficiently

SUG Suggest

SUGG Suggesting

SUGS Suggests

SUP Supply

SUPG Supplying

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-17

B-18

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

SUPR Superior

SUPSD Supersede

SUPSDG Superseding

SUPSDS Supersedes

SVG Serving

SVR Severe

SVRL Several

SW Southwest

SW- Light snow shower

SW+ Heavy snow shower

SWD Southward

SWLG Swelling

SWLY Southwesterly

SWODY1 SPC Severe

Weather Outlook for

Day 1

SWOMCD SPC Mesoscale

discussion

SWRN Southwestern

SWWD Southwestward

SX Stability index

SXN Section

SYNOP Synoptic

SYNS Synopsis

SYS System

T Thunder

TA Temperature

TACAN UHF Tactical Air

Navigation Aid

TAF Terminal Area

Forecast

TB Turbulence

TCNTL Transcontinental

TCU Towering cumulus

TDA Today

TEI Text element indi-

cator

TEMP Temperature

TEMPO Temporary

THD Thunderhead

THDR Thunder

THK Thick

THKNG Thickening

THKNS Thickness

THKR Thicker

THKST Thickest

THN Thin

THNG Thinning

THNR Thinner

THNST Thinnest

THR Threshold

THRFTR Thereafter

THRU Through

THRUT Throughout

THSD Thousand

THTN Threaten

THTND Threatened

THTNG Threatening

THTNS Threatens

TIL Until

TKOF Takeoff

TM Time

TMPRY Temporary

TMPRYLY Temporarily

TMW Tomorrow

TN Tennessee

TNDCY Tendency

TNDCYS Tendencies

TNGT Tonight

TNTV Tentative

TNTVLY Tentatively

TOC Top of Climb

TOP Top of Clouds

TOPS Tops

TOVC Top of overcast

TP Type of aircraft

TPG Topping

TRBL Trouble

TRIB Tributary

TRKG Tracking

TRML Terminal

TRMT Terminate

TRMTD Terminated

TRMTG Terminating

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-18

B-19

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

TRMTS Terminates

TRNSP Transport

TRNSPG Transporting

TROF Trough

TROFS Troughs

TROP Tropopause

TRPCD Tropical continental

air mass

TRPCL Tropical

TRRN Terrain

TRSN Transition

TRW Thunderstorm

TRW+ Thunderstorm with

heavy rain shower

TS Thunderstorm

(METAR)

TS + Thunderstorm with

heavy snow

TSFR Transfer

TSFRD Transferred

TSFRG Transferring

TSFRS Transfers

TSHWR Thundershower

TSNO Thunderstorm infor-

mation not available

TSNT Transient

TSQLS Thundersquall

TSTM Thunderstorm

TSW Thunderstorm with

snow showers

TSW+ Thunderstorm with

heavy snow showers

TURBC Turbulence

TURBT Turbulent

TWD Toward

TWDS Towards

TWI Twilight

TWR Tower

TWRG Towering

TX Texas

UA Pilot weather reports

UDDF Up- and downdrafts

UN Unable

UNAVBL Unavailable

UNEC Unnecessary

UNKN Unknown

UNL Unlimited

UNRELBL Unreliable

UNRSTD Unrestricted

UNSATFY Unsatisfactory

UNSBL Unseasonable

UNSTBL Unstable

UNSTDY Unsteady

UNSTL Unsettle

UNSTLD Unsettled

UNUSBL Unusable

UP Unknown precipita-

tion (used only by

automated sites

incapable of discrimi-

nation)

UPDFTS Updrafts

UPR Upper

UPSLP Upslope

UPSTRM Upstream

URG Urgent

USBL Usable

UT Utah

UTC Universal Time

Coordinate

UUA Urgent PIREP

Weather Reports

UVV Upward vertical

velocity

UWNDS Upper winds

V Varies

VA Virginia or Volcanic

Ash

VAAC Volcanic Ash

Advisory Center

VAAS Volcanic Ash

Advisory Statement

VAD Velocity azimuth

display

VAL Valley

VARN Variation

VC Vicinity

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-19

B-20

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

VCNTY Vicinity

VCOT VFR conditions on

top

VCTR Vector

VCTS Thunderstorms in

the vicinity

VDUC VAS Data Utilization

Center (NSSFC)

VFR Visual flight rules

VFY Verify

VFYD Verified

VFYG Verifying

VFYS Verifies

VHF Very High Frequency

VIS Visibility

VSNO Visibility at second-

ary location not avail-

able

VLCTY Velocity

VLCTYS Velocities

VLNT Violent

VLNTLY Violently

VLY Valley

VMC Visual meteorolog-

ical conditions

VOL Volume

VOR VHF

Omnidirectional

Radio Range

VORT Vorticity

VORTAC VOR and TACAN

combination

VR Veer

VRB Variable

VRG Veering

VRBL Variable

VRISL Vancouver Island,BC

VRS Veers

VRT MOTN Vertical motion

VRY Very

VSB Visible

VSBY Visibility

VSBYDR Visibility decreasing

rapidly

VSBYIR Visibility increasing

rapidly

VT Vermont

VV Vertical velocity or

vertical visibility

VWP VAD Wind profiler

W West

WA Washington

WAA Warm air advection

WAFS Word Area Forecast

System

WBND Westbound

WDLY Widely

WDSPRD Widespread

WEA Weather

WFO Weather Forecast

Office

WFSO Weather Forecast

Service Office

WFP Warm front passage

WI Wisconsin

WIBIS Will be issued

WINT Winter

WK Weak

WKDAY Weekday

WKEND Weekend

WKNG Weakening

WKNS Weakens

WKR Weaker

WKST Weakest

WKN Weaken

WL Will

WLY Westerly

WMO World Meteorological

Organization

WND Wind

WNDS Winds

WNW West-northwest

WNWLY West-northwesterly

WNWRN West-northwestern

WNWWD West-northwest-

ward

WO Without

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-20

B-21

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

WPLTO Western Plateau

WRM Warm

WRMG Warming

WRMR Warmer

WRMST Warmest

WRMFNT Warm front

WRMFNTL Warm frontal

WRN Western

WRNG Warning

WRS Worse

WS Wind shear

WSHFT Windshift

WSFO Weather Service

Forecast Office

WSO Weather service

office

WSR-88D NWS Doppler

Radar

WSTCH Wasatch Range

WSW West-southwest

WSWLY West-southwesterly

WSWRN West-southwestern

WSWWD West-southwest-

ward

WTR Water

WTSPT Waterspout

WUD Would

WV West Virginia or wind

WVS Waves

WW Severe weather

watch

WWD Westward

WWS Severe weather

watches

WX Weather

WY Wyoming

XCP Except

XPC Expect

XPCD Expected

XPCG Expecting

XPCS Expects

XPLOS Explosive

XTND Extend

XTNDD Extended

XTNDG Extending

XTRM Extreme

XTRMLY Extremely

YDA Yesterday

YKN Yukon

YLSTN Yellowstone

Z Zulu time

ZL Freezing drizzle

ZN Zone

ZNS Zones

ZR Freezing rain

Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-21

B-22

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix B

Wx Abbreviations

Common Weather Abbreviations

Intentionally left blank

Appendix B 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page B-22

C-1

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix C

GPS Primer

APPENDIX C

GPS PRIMER

BACKGROUND

The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based navigation

system that was originally conceived and implemented by the United

States Department of Defense (DoD). The system is, however, available

to all civilian users free of charge. GPS provides extremely precise posi-

tion, velocity, and time information.

The satellites are not geosynchronous, as is the case with many weather

and television satellites. That is, each satellite is not above a fixed spot

on the Earth all the time, but rather is continuously moving across the

sky. In fact, each satellite completely orbits the Earth two times per day.

The Department of Defense has the capability to impose an intentional

accuracy degradation of the GPS system. This degradation is known as

Selective Availability (SA). When SA is active, only U.S. military users

have access to full GPS accuracy. For civilian users, position accuracy

is degraded to no worse than 100 meters 95% of the time. At the time of

this writing, Selective Availability has been turned off by the DOD but it

could be turned back on at another time .

GPS POSITION DETERMINING CONCEPT

The technique used to determine position is fundamentally very simple.

The complicated part is accounting for and correcting all the possible

errors in the position.

The GPS receiver is able to determine the time it takes a radio signal to

travel from the satellite to the GPS antenna. Since this radio signal

travels at the speed of light (approximately 186,000 statute miles per

second), the time delay can very easily be used to determine the

receiver’s distance from a given satellite. If measurements are taken

from four satellites (or three satellites and an input from an aircraft

altimeter), the receiver can identify its position very precisely.

For example, the GPS receiver might determine that it is exactly 12,000

miles from satellite A, 12,700 miles from satellite B, and 13,100 miles

from satellite C. At the same time, the aircraft’s encoding altimeter might

be indicating an altitude of 9,500 feet MSL. There is only one point in

space that satisfies these four measurements.

GPS DATA SIGNALS

Two of the primary types of signals that the GPS satellites broadcast are

almanac and ephemeris data. These signals enable the GPS receiver to

GPS Primer

Appendix C 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page C-1

C-2

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix C

GPS Primer

quickly lock on to the satellites in view. Otherwise, the receiver would

have to look for each of the 24 satellites to determine which ones could

be used.

Almanac data is very crude data which describes the approximate orbital

position of the satellites. Each of the 24 satellites transmits the almanac

data for all satellites, so a GPS receiver has only to listen to one satellite

in order to know which satellites are “visible” (in the sky) at that particular

time. Almanac data is good for about six months, so when you turn the

receiver off, then back on a month later, it will know what satellites to

look for.

Ephemeris data is very precise data which each satellite transmits to tell

the GPS receiver exactly where it is and what its orbital parameters will

be for about the next four hours. Each satellite transmits its own unique

ephemeris data.

GPS SYSTEM SEGMENTS

The GPS system is composed of three segments: the Space Segment,

the Control Segment, and the User Segment.

The Space Segment consists of the 24 NAVSTAR satellites which orbit

the earth at an altitude of 10,898 nautical miles. The satellite orbits are

very precisely planned so that the entire surface of the earth may use the

GPS system 24 hours a day, every day. There are almost always more

than six satellites in view from anywhere on Earth.

The Control Segment consists of a network of ground-based monitoring

and control stations. The Master Control Station is located in Colorado

Springs, Colorado. All satellite data which is collected by the other

ground stations is assimilated and analyzed at Colorado Springs. Based

on these analyses, ephemeris updates (such as system clock correc-

tions) are sent (uplinked) to the satellites through radio transmitters at

the ground stations. These ground stations are located at Kwajalein

(west of Hawaii in the central Pacific Ocean), Diego Garcia (in the Indian

Ocean), and Ascension (in the south Atlantic Ocean).

As an owner of a GPS system, you can now claim to be a certified

member of the GPS User Segment! GPS has many users and uses,

and more are being dreamed up all the time. Not only are aircraft using

GPS navigation, so are military systems and personnel, boaters, hikers,

and surveyors. Personal automobiles and transport trucks use Intelligent

Transportation Systems, or ITS, to find their destinations, and track their

movements. Some biologists attach GPS receivers to animals to mon-

itor their movement and migration patterns. Geologists even use GPS to

track the movement of glaciers and to analyze plate tectonics (move-

ments of the Earth’s crust).

GPS Primer

Appendix C 8/13/07 10:02 AM Page C-2

D-1

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix D

Navigation Terms

APPENDIX D - NAVIGATION TERMS

Navigation Terms

BRG - Bearing to waypoint (degrees)

DA - Drift Angle (degrees) - (not displayed)

DIS - Distance to waypoint (nm)

DTK - Desired Track (degrees)

ETE - Estimated Time Enroute (hrs:min)

ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival

GS - Groundspeed (nm/hr)

HDG - Heading (degrees)

OBS - Selected Course

POS - Present position

TRK - Actual Track (degrees)

WPT - Waypoint

XTK - Cross Track Error Correction (nm) displayed as “FLY L 2.3 nm” on

CDI or HSI.

WPT 1

WIND

POS

HDG DA

NORTH

WPT 2

DIS/ETE/ETA/GS

ON TRACK

Enroute-Leg Mode

BRG

TRK

DTK

NORTH

BRG

OBS

OFF TRACK

Enroute-OBS Mode

WIND

POS

XTK

HDG

NORTH

ACTIVE WPT

DIS/ETE/ETA

TRK

WPT 1

WIND

POS

XTK

TRK

HDG

DTK

BRG

NORTH

WPT 2

OFF TRACK

Enroute Leg Mode

DIS/ETE/ETA

Appendix D 8/13/07 10:03 AM Page D-1

D-2

Rev 2 Apr/2004 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix D

Navigation Terms

Intentionally left blank

Appendix D 8/13/07 10:03 AM Page D-2

I-1

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Absolute Altitude 1-17, 1-18, 3-4, 3-5, 3-13

Absolute Terrain 1-18, 1-19

Absolute Terrain Color Key 1-18

Activate 1-3, 1-55, 1-56, 1-57, 1-64, 1-72, 1-73, 1-76

Active Flight Plan 1-15, 1-33, 1-55, 1-56, 1-57, 1-59, 1-60, 1-61, 1-64,

1-65, 1-69, 1-71, 1-72, 1-73, 1-74, 1-75, 1-77, 1-78, 1-84

Aeronautical Data 1-34, 1-35, 1-95

Aged 2-17

Air Data Computer 1-29

AIRMET 2-3, 2-10, 2-18, 2-21, 2-32, 2-35, 2-38, 2-39, 2-41, 2-44,

2-47, 2-50, 2-53, 2-54, 2-72, 2-73

Airplane Icon 1-20

Airport Filter 1-36

Airport Identifier 1-25, 1-35

Airport Info 1 of 2 1-25, 1-60

Airport Info 2 of 2 1-25, 1-60

Airport Info Field Definitions 1-27

Airport Information 1-25, 1-28, 1-47

Airport Settings 1-81

Airspace Alert 1-30, 1-31, 1-32, 1-86

Alert Weather Watches 2-3, 2-12, 2-32, 2-35, 2-38, 2-41, 2-44, 2-47,

2-50, 2-78, 2-79

Altimeter 1-9, 1-21, 2-7, C-1

Altimeter Setting 1-21-1-29, 2-67

Altitude Encoder 1-29

Altitude Volume 3-4

AMR 1-87, 1-95

ATI 1-87, 1-95

Audio Mute 3-13

Index

I-2

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Auto 1-23, 1-85, 1-88, 2-7, 2-65

Auto Leg Sequencing 1-57, 1-59, 1-76

Auto Zoom 1-23

Auto-Pop-Up 3-4, 3-7, 3-13, 3-15

AutoNav 1-84

Autopilot 1-39, 1-85

Aux Menu 1-16, 1-22, 1-31, 1-42, 1-52, 1-84, 1-86, 1-88, 1-89, 1-90,

1-97, 1-98, 2-23, 2-26, 2-27, 5-1, 5-2, 5-4

Aux-Main Menu 2-23, 5-2

Aux-Messages 5-2

Aviation Icon Group 1-82

Aviation Line Group 1-82

Baro Altitude 1-9

Baro Correction 1-21, 1-22, 1-29

Baro Entry 1-22

Base Reflectivity 2-3, 2-13, 2-15, 2-31, 2-32

Bearing 1-5, 1-11, 1-14, 1-24, 1-44, 1-45, 1-46, 1-56, 1-75, 2-33, 2-35,

3-6, 3-9, 3-11, 3-14, 4-1

BRG 1-12

Brightness Control 1-3, 1-10

Buffer Altitude 1-30, 1-32

Calculator 1-78

Cartographic Data 1-95

Caution, No Position Data 1-23

Cell Mode 4-3

Index

I-3

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Change Area 2-53, 2-56, 2-60

Change Fields 1-12, 1-61, 1-79

Choose Product 2-29, 2-53, 2-55

Closest Point of Approach 3-5, 3-14

Coast Mode 3-16

Composite Reflectivity 2-3, 2-13, 2-15, 2-31, 2-32

Cone of Silence 3-10, 3-11

Convective SIGMET 2-3, 2-11, 2-12, 2-21, 2-32, 2-35, 2-38, 2-41, 2-44,

2-45, 2-47, 2-50, 2-76, 2-77

Copy 1-66, 1-71

Course Deviation Indicator 1-9, 1-11, 1-13, 1-84

Crosstrack Error 1-39

Current Nav Source 1-84

Current Navigation Source 1-4, 1-55

Data Columns 1-61, 1-78, 1-79

Data Field 1-12, 1-38, 1-84, 1-85, 1-86, 3-7, 3-15, 3-16

Database Subscriptions 1-100

Database Versions 1-90

Datacards 1-95, 1-97, 1-100

Date and Time of Issue 2-7, 2-9, 2-65, 2-68

Date and Time Valid 2-9, 2-68

Declutter 1-34, 1-35

Delete 1-53, 1-66, 1-69, 1-70, 1-71, 1-74

Demo Mode 1-5, 1-86, 1-87, 1-88

Dew Point 2-7, 2-67

Direct-To 1-2, 1-4, 1-37, 1-55, 1-56, 1-57, 1-72, 1-73, 1-74, 1-75, 1-77

Discharge Points 4-2, 4-4, 4-5

Index

I-4

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Edit WPT 1-52

Edit/Review 1-66

Electrical Discharge 4-4

Encoded 2-7, 2-8, 2-9, 2-10, 2-11

Enroute Safe Altitude 1-14, 1-15

Expiration 2-3, 2-17, 2-22, 2-33, 2-56, 2-73, 2-75, 2-77

Extended TRK 1-81

Fee-Based 2-3, 2-7, 2-13, 2-21

FFLOW 1-61, 1-79, 1-80

Fields Off 1-11, 1-12

Filter Area 2-53, 2-55, 2-56, 2-60

Find Nearest 1-4, 1-35, 1-37, 1-55

FIS Display ID 2-21, 2-23

FIS Graphics Page 2-29, 2-32, 2-35, 2-38, 2-41, 2-44, 2-47, 2-50

FIS Info 1-25, 1-26

FIS Network Status Page 2-49, 2-50, 5-3

FIS Notifications 2-63, 2-64

FIS Products 2-22

FIS Receiver Failure 5-1, 5-3

FIS Subscription Status Page 2-22, 2-26

FIS Text Page 2-29, 2-54

Flight Information Services 1-2, 1-5, 1-83, 2-1

Flight Level 2-9, 2-70, 2-72, 3-4, 3-13

Flight Plan Index 1-59, 1-62, 1-63, 1-64, 1-65, 1-66, 1-68, 1-70,

1-71, 1-80

Flight Plan Page 1-38, 1-61

Index

I-5

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Flight Planning 1-2, 1-16, 2-4

FPL 1-59, 1-62, 1-64, 1-66, 1-70, 1-71, 1-73, 1-97, 1-98

Freezing Level 2-18, 2-73, 2-75

Freq 1-50

Fuel 1-25, 1-61, 1-78, 1-80

Fuel Flow 1-61, 1-79

Function Select Key 1-3, 1-4, 1-10, 1-18, 2-29, 2-32, 2-35, 2-38, 2-41,

2-44, 2-47, 2-50, 2-53, 2-54, 3-3, 3-12, 4-2

Function Status Icons 1-5, 1-6, 2-5, 3-2, 4-1

Global Positioning System 1-16, C-1, C-2

GPS Altitude 1-9, 1-21

GPS Receiver 1-16, 5-3, C-1, C-2

Graphical AIRMET 2-3, 2-18, 2-21, 2-37, 2-38

Graphical Alert Weather Watches 2-3, 2-20, 2-46

Graphical Convective SIGMET 2-3, 2-19, 2-21, 2-43, 2-44

Graphical METAR 2-3, 2-17, 2-18, 2-21, 2-34, 2-35, 2-54

Graphical SIGMET 2-3, 2-19, 2-21, 2-40, 2-41

Graphical Weather Products 2-29, 2-32, 2-35, 2-38, 2-41, 2-44, 2-47,

2-50, 2-53, 2-55

Graphical Weather Watches 2-47

Great Circle 1-14

Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude 1-14, 1-15

Heading 1-11, 1-87, 3-9, 3-14, 4-2, 4-5

Heading Stabilization 4-2

Heading Up 1-23, 1-81

Index

I-6

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

ICAO Station Identifier 2-7, 2-9, 2-17, 2-65, 2-68

ICAO/WMO 2-3

Icing 2-10, 2-11, 2-71, 2-72, 2-74

IFR Map 1-18, 1-19

Insert After 1-68

Insert Before 1-68

Insert PPOS 1-79

Insert WPT 1-63

Inserting 1-67, 1-78, 1-79, 1-96

Intensity 2-8, 2-13, 2-15, 2-16, 2-71

Internal VFR GPS 1-1, 1-4, 1-84

Invert 1-65

Jeppesen 1-1, 1-14, 1-15, 1-29, 1-95, 1-100

Joystick 2-16, 2-18, 2-23, 2-24, 2-29, 2-32, 2-33, 2-35, 2-36, 2-38,

2-39, 2-41, 2-42, 2-44, 2-45, 2-47, 2-48, 2-50, 2-53, 2-55, 2-56,

2-57, 2-58, 2-60, 2-61

Knob Scan 2-59, 2-61

Label 1-4, 1-5, 1-81, 1-96, 2-26, 2-54

Land Data 1-34, 1-35

Land Icon Group 1-82

Land Line Group 1-83

Index

I-7

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Lat/Lon 1-85

Latitude 1-14, 1-15, 1-24, 1-44, 1-45, 1-46, 1-85

Leg 1-33, 1-38, 1-39, 1-57, 1-59, 1-60, 1-61, 1-72, 1-73, 1-75

Leg Mode 1-33, 1-59, 1-77

Legend 1-18, 1-20, 2-16, 2-18, 2-19, 2-20, 2-33, 2-36, 2-39,

2-42, 2-45, 2-48, 3-6, 3-15

Length 1-36, 1-44, 1-49

Longitude 1-14, 1-15, 1-24, 1-44, 1-45, 1-46, 1-85

Magnetic Variation 1-14, 1-85, 5-4

Map Orientation 3-7, 3-16

Map Settings Group 1 1-81

Map Setup 1-23, 1-28, 1-81, 1-83, 4-5

Map Setup Overlays Group Page 1-5, 1-6

Map View 1-60

Menu Key 1-3, 1-12, 1-16, 1-22, 1-31, 1-34, 1-42, 1-52, 1-81, 1-84,

1-88, 1-89, 1-90, 1-97, 1-98, 2-23, 2-26, 2-27, 2-29, 3-4, 3-7,

3-13, 3-15, 4-2, 4-35-1

Message 1-9, 1-30, 1-31, 1-32, 1-86, 2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 2-27, 4-2, 5-1,

5-3, 5-4

Message Press Menu 1-31, 5-1

METAR 1-25, 1-26, 2-4, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9, 2-17, 2-18, 2-32, 2-35, 2-36,

2-38, 2-41, 2-44, 2-47, 2-50, 2-53, 2-54, 2-55, 2-64, 2-65

Min Rwy Len 1-81

Minimum Safe Altitude 1-11, 1-14, 1-61

MORA 1-14, 1-15

More Info 1-24, 1-25, 1-27, 1-28, 1-35, 1-60, 2-36, 2-39, 2-42, 2-45,

2-48, 2-54

Mountain Obscuration 2-10, 2-72

Mute 3-13

Index

I-8

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Nav Data Settings 1-84, 1-85, 1-86

Navaid 1-27, 1-28, 1-45, 1-46, 2-9, 2-73

Navaid Information 1-27

Navigation Setup 1-11, 1-12, 1-13, 1-30, 1-31, 1-38, 1-84, 5-3, 5-4

Near Position 1-11, 1-12, 1-86

Nearest 1-3, 1-4, 1-12, 1-26, 1-35, 1-36, 1-37, 1-55, 2-53, 2-56, 2-65,

2-67, 2-70

New FPL 1-62

New WPT 1-43

NEXRAD 2-13, 2-14, 2-15, 2-16, 2-21, 2-31, 2-32, 2-33, 2-35, 2-38,

2-41, 2-44, 2-47, 2-50, 2-63

NEXRAD Base Reflectivity 2-3, 2-13, 2-32

NEXRAD Composite Reflectivity 2-3, 2-13, 2-32

Next DTK 1-38

Next Group 1-82, 1-83

No Data 2-16, 2-33

No Data Received from Stormscope® 4-2

No-Bearing 3-6

No-Cost 2-3

North Pointer 1-23

North Up 1-23, 1-81, 3-7, 3-16

NRST 1-3, 1-4, 1-35

OBS 1-15, 1-33, 1-56, 1-57, 1-75, 1-76, 1-77

Off-Scale 3-6, 3-14

Orientation 1-23, 1-25, 1-48, 1-81

OSGB 1-85

Overlay 1-2, 1-5, 1-33, 1-83

Index

I-9

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Overlays Group 1-5, 1-6, 1-81, 1-83

OVLY Setup 1-81, 1-83

PAI 1-87, 1-95

PBRG 1-24, 1-85

PDIS 1-24, 1-85

PIREP 2-3, 2-9, 2-10, 2-21, 2-30, 2-55, 2-70

Pop-Up 1-10, 3-4, 3-7, 3-11, 3-13, 3-15

Position Format 1-85

Power Down 1-10

Power-Up 1-8, 1-23, 1-87, 4-2

Present Position 1-11, 1-12, 1-14, 1-15, 1-16, 1-24, 1-33, 1-35,

1-37, 1-44, 1-45, 1-55, 1-72, 1-78, 1-79, 1-81, 2-33, 2-34,

2-35, 2-36, 2-38, 2-39, 2-41, 2-42, 2-44, 2-45, 2-47, 2-48,

2-50, 2-51, 2-56

PREV 1-20

QuickTune™ 1-16, 1-50

Radial 1-14

Range Rings 1-81

Real-Time Weather 2-1

Relative Terrain and Obstacles 1-20

Relative Terrain Map 1-18, 1-19, 1-20, 1-21

Remarks 1-43, 1-44, 1-47, 2-7, 2-10, 2-67, 2-72

Required Fuel 1-78, 1-79

Index

I-10

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Reset Stick 1-18, 1-20, 1-24, 1-60, 1-68, 2-34, 2-36, 2-39, 2-42,

2-45, 2-48, 2-51

Resolution Advisory 1-6, 3-5, 3-6

Restart Demo 1-88

Restore Default 1-12, 1-61

RNG 1-4, 1-23, 1-24, 1-25, 2-32, 2-33, 2-35, 2-36, 2-38, 2-41,

2-42, 2-44, 2-45, 2-47, 2-48, 2-50, 2-53, 2-55, 3-4, 3-13, 4-4

Runway 1-25, 1-36, 1-48, 1-49, 1-81, 2-65

Runway Type 1-36

Runway Visibility 2-8

Runway Visual Range 2-7, 2-65

Save & Exit 1-46, 1-50

Sector Altitude 1-15

See Chart 1-29

Select WX Product 2-53, 2-55

Self Test 1-8, 4-2

SIGMET 2-3, 2-10, 2-11, 2-12, 2-19, 2-21, 2-32, 2-35, 2-38, 2-41,

2-42, 2-44, 2-47, 2-50, 2-73, 2-74, 2-75

Signal Strength 1-16, 2-63, 2-64

Significant Meteorological Information 2-11

Significant Weather 2-8, 2-10, 2-69

Sky Condition 2-7, 2-9, 2-67, 2-69

Softkeys 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-20, 1-22, 1-59

Software Version 1-16, 1-89

SPECI 2-3, 2-8, 2-17, 2-21, 2-65

Special Use Airspace 1-29, 1-30, 1-86, 5-3

Standby 1-6, 3-4

Status Icon 1-5, 1-6

Index

I-11

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Store Current User Data 1-97

Stored Flight Plan 1-60, 1-62, 1-64, 1-66, 1-69, 1-70

Stormscope® 1-2, 1-5, 1-6, 1-8, 1-83, 2-29, 2-32, 2-35, 2-38, 2-41,

2-44, 2-47, 2-50, 2-53, 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, 4-4, 4-5

Stormscope® Icons 4-1

Strategic Weather Planning 2-4

Strike Mode 4-3, 4-5

SUA Alerting 1-29, 1-31, 1-32, 1-86

Subscription 1-90, 1-100, 2-7, 2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 2-24, 2-25, 2-26, 2-27,

2-30, 2-63, 5-3, 5-4

Subscription Code 2-21, 2-22, 2-24, 2-64

Subscription Service 1-96, 2-7, 2-13, 2-22, 2-25

Surface 1-49, 1-81, 2-10, 2-14, 2-15, 2-72, 2-73, 2-76, 2-78, 2-79

Surface Visibility 2-8

System Test 3-8

TAF 2-3, 2-8, 2-9, 2-21, 2-55, 2-68, 2-70

Temperature 2-7, 2-9, 2-14, 2-67, 2-71, 5-3

Test 3-4, 3-8

Text 1-23, 1-39, 1-44, 1-82, 1-83, 2-21, 3-16, 4-2, 4-5, 5-1, 5-3, 5-4

Textual Weather Products 2-29, 2-32, 2-35, 2-38, 2-41, 2-44, 2-47,

2-50, 2-52, 2-53

Time Zone 1-85

Topological Data 1-95

Track Up 1-23, 1-81

Traffic 1-1, 1-2, 1-5, 1-6, 1-11, 1-83, 3-1, 3-2, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11,

3-13, 3-14, 3-15, 3-16

Traffic Advisory 1-6, 3-5, 3-6, 3-14, 3-15

Traffic Avoidance 1-2, 1-5, 1-83, 3-1, 3-2, 3-5, 3-6, 3-8

Traffic Display 3-1, 3-3, 3-4, 3-7, 3-12, 3-13, 3-15, 3-16

Index

I-12

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Traffic Function 3-1, 3-2, 3-6, 3-8, 3-15

Traffic Function Status Icons 3-2

Traffic Information Service 3-1, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14, 3-15,

3-16, 3-17, 3-18

TRFC 1-10, 1-11, 3-3, 3-6, 3-12

TRK 1-10, 1-81

Turbulence 2-10, 2-11, 2-14, 2-15, 2-71, 2-72, 2-73, 2-74, 2-75

Turn Anticipation 1-38, 1-39, 1-86

Turn Guidance 1-38, 1-86

Turn To 1-38, 1-39

Type of Report 2-7, 2-9, 2-59, 2-62

Use Actual 1-80

Use Stick 1-60, 1-63, 1-68

User Airport 1-47, 1-48

User Airport Edit 1-47, 1-48

User Defined Area Entry 2-57, 2-58, 2-60

User Waypoint 1-41, 1-42, 1-43, 1-44, 1-46, 1-47, 1-52, 1-53, 1-55,

1-56, 1-96, 1-97, 1-98, 1-100, 5-3

User Waypoint Edit 1-41, 1-43, 1-44, 1-47, 1-52

User Waypoint List 1-42, 1-46, 1-52, 1-53

UTM 1-85

VDL 1-2, 1-7, 1-90, 1-100, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-7, 2-9, 2-12,

2-13, 2-15, 2-16, 2-20, 2-21, 2-22, 2-31, 2-33, 2-34, 2-37, 2-40,

2-43, 2-46, 2-49, 2-52, 2-63, 2-64, 5-3, 5-4

VDL Datacards 1-100

VDL Database Subscriptions 1-100

Index

I-13

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

VDL Icon 1-7, 2-5

VDL Subscription 2-3, 2-13, 2-21, 2-24, 2-25, 5-4

Vertical Buffer 1-30

VFR Map 1-6, 1-16, 1-18, 1-19, 1-82, 1-83

VFR Map Display 1-6, 1-9

VOR Receiver 1-56

Waypoint Alert 1-9, 1-38, 1-39

Waypoint Entry 1-45, 1-46, 1-55, 1-62, 1-67

Waypoint Position 1-44

Weather Phenomena 2-7, 2-9, 2-12

Wind Shear 2-9, 2-18, 2-73

Wingman Services 2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 2-51, 1-100, 2-25

WPT 1-9, 1-11, 1-38, 1-43, 1-52, 1-53, 1-59, 1-63, 1-66, 1-86, 2-53, 2-56

XM 1-2, 1-7, 1-90, 1-100, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-13, 2-15, 2-16,

2-21, 2-26, 2-27, 2-29, 2-30, 2-31, 2-32, 2-33, 2-34, 2-37, 2-40,

2-43, 2-52, 2-63, 5-3, 5-4

XM Icon 1-7, 2-5

XM Subscription 2-3, 2-7, 2-13, 2-21, 2-26, 2-27

XM Subscriptions 1-100, 2-26

XTK 1-11, 1-39

Index

I-14

Rev 4 Aug/2007 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Index

Intentionally left blank

Honeywell Aerospace

Business and General Aviation

Honeywell International Inc.

One Technology Center

23500 West 105th Street

Olathe, KS 66061

Telephone: (913) 712-0400

FAX: (913) 712-1302

www.honeywell.com

006-18281-0000

Rev. 4 08/07

Honeywell Kmd 250 Users Manual PG Cover R4

KMD 250 to the manual dd3b6629-9ac5-4faf-bd2c-73945aa0d89c

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation